WO2024065461A1 - 多链路通信的方法及设备 - Google Patents

多链路通信的方法及设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024065461A1
WO2024065461A1 PCT/CN2022/122814 CN2022122814W WO2024065461A1 WO 2024065461 A1 WO2024065461 A1 WO 2024065461A1 CN 2022122814 W CN2022122814 W CN 2022122814W WO 2024065461 A1 WO2024065461 A1 WO 2024065461A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mld
link
affiliated
field
links
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/122814
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
卢刘明
罗朝明
Original Assignee
Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Oppo广东移动通信有限公司 filed Critical Oppo广东移动通信有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2022/122814 priority Critical patent/WO2024065461A1/zh
Publication of WO2024065461A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024065461A1/zh

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/15—Setup of multiple wireless link connections

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and device for multi-link communications.
  • non-AP MLD non-access point multi-link device
  • AP MLD access point multi-link device
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for multi-link communication, which can ensure that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • a multi-link communication method comprising:
  • the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated access point AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established; where M is a positive integer.
  • a multi-link communication method comprising:
  • the AP MLD receives a first association request frame or a second association request frame through an AP to which it is affiliated;
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA in the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled;
  • M is a positive integer.
  • a multi-link communication method comprising:
  • the non-AP MLD manages the N established links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to each of the N links and the AP MLD-affiliated access points AP, where N is a positive integer.
  • a multi-link communication method comprising:
  • AP MLD manages the N established links based on the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to each of the N links, where N is a positive integer.
  • a non-AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the first aspect.
  • the non-AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • an AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the second aspect above.
  • the AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned second aspect.
  • a non-AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the third aspect.
  • the non-AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned third aspect.
  • an AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the fourth aspect.
  • the AP MLD includes functional modules for executing the method in the fourth aspect above.
  • a non-AP MLD comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the non-AP MLD executes the method in the first aspect above.
  • an AP MLD comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the above second aspect.
  • a non-AP MLD comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the non-AP MLD executes the method in the third aspect above.
  • an AP MLD comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the fourth aspect above.
  • a device for implementing the method in any one of the first to fourth aspects above.
  • the apparatus includes: a processor, configured to call and run a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the apparatus executes the method in any one of the first to fourth aspects described above.
  • a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program, wherein the computer program enables a computer to execute the method in any one of the first to fourth aspects above.
  • a computer program product comprising computer program instructions, wherein the computer program instructions enable a computer to execute the method in any one of the first to fourth aspects above.
  • a computer program which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method in any one of the first to fourth aspects above.
  • non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with AP MLD according to the communication reachability between non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established; and/or, non-AP MLD manages N links according to the communication reachability between non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links; and/or, AP MLD manages N links according to the communication reachability between AP MLD-affiliated AP and non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the N established links. This ensures that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP for the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, and reports relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or reports relevant information on whether the M links are enabled, so as to reflect the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, so as to ensure that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the non-AP MLD sets the enabled link in the N links where the communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable to the disabled state, or the non-AP MLD deletes the link in the N links where the communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the AP MLD sets the enabled link in the N links where communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable to the disabled state, or the AP MLD deletes the link in the N links where communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system architecture applied in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a schematic diagram provided by the present application of a non-AP MLD obtaining information about an AP MLD and each affiliated AP of interest.
  • FIG3 is a schematic flowchart of a multi-link communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG4 is a schematic flowchart of a multi-link establishment provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG5 is a schematic diagram of a site control domain provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG6 is a schematic flowchart of another multi-link establishment provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of another site control domain provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG8 is a schematic diagram of yet another site control domain provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram of a site information domain provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a maximum idle time period information field during link enablement provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG11 is a schematic diagram of an idle option subfield during link enablement according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of an existence bitmap subdomain provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a general information domain provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG14 is a schematic flowchart of multi-link management provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic flowchart of another multi-link management provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flowchart of another multi-link communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic flowchart of yet another multi-link management provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic flowchart of yet another multi-link management provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flowchart of yet another multi-link communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flowchart of yet another multi-link communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 21 is a schematic block diagram of a non-AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 22 is a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 23 is a schematic block diagram of another non-AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 24 is a schematic block diagram of another AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 25 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 26 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 27 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system provided according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Networks
  • WiFi Wireless Fidelity
  • the wireless communication system may include: an access point (Access Point, AP) and a station (Station, STA).
  • AP Access Point
  • STA station
  • AP can be called AP STA, that is, in a sense, AP is also a STA. In some scenarios, STA is called non-AP STA.
  • STA may include AP STA and non-AP STA.
  • the communication in the communication system may be communication between AP and non-AP STA, communication between non-AP STA and non-AP STA, or communication between STA and peer STA.
  • Peer STA may refer to a device that communicates with the STA peer.
  • peer STA may be an AP or a non-AP STA.
  • AP is equivalent to a bridge connecting wired network and wireless network. Its main function is to connect various wireless network clients together and then connect the wireless network to Ethernet.
  • AP devices can be terminal devices (such as mobile phones) or network devices (such as routers) with wireless fidelity (WIFI) chips.
  • WIFI wireless fidelity
  • the role of STA in the communication system is not absolute.
  • the mobile phone when a mobile phone is connected to a router, the mobile phone is a non-AP STA.
  • the mobile phone plays the role of an AP.
  • APs and non-AP STAs can be devices used in Internet of Vehicles, IoT nodes and sensors in the Internet of Things (IoT), smart cameras, smart remote controls, smart water and electricity meters in smart homes, and sensors in smart cities.
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • non-AP STA can support 802.11be.
  • Non-AP STA can also support 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b and 802.11a and other current and future 802.11 family wireless LAN standards.
  • the AP may be a device supporting the 802.11be standard.
  • the AP may also be a device supporting various current and future 802.11 family WLAN standards such as 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b and 802.11a.
  • STA can be a mobile phone (Mobile Phone), tablet computer (Pad), computer, virtual reality (VR) device, augmented reality (AR) device, wireless device in industrial control (industrial control), set-top box, wireless device in self-driving, vehicle-mounted communication equipment, wireless device in remote medical, wireless device in smart grid (smart grid), wireless device in transportation safety (transportation safety), wireless device in smart city (smart city) or wireless device in smart home (smart home), wireless communication chip, ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), SOC (System on Chip), etc. that supports WLAN/WIFI technology.
  • the frequency bands supported by WLAN technology may include but are not limited to: low frequency bands (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz) and high frequency bands (45 GHz, 60 GHz).
  • the station and the access point support multi-band communication. For example, communicating on the 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, 45 GHz, and 60 GHz bands at the same time, or communicating on different channels of the same band (or different bands) at the same time, improves the communication throughput and/or reliability between devices.
  • a device is generally called a multi-band device, or a multi-link device (Multi-Link Device, MLD), sometimes also referred to as a multi-link entity or a multi-band entity.
  • MLD multi-link device
  • a multi-link device can be an access point device or a station device. If the multi-link device is an access point device, the multi-link device contains one or more APs; if the multi-link device is a station device, the multi-link device contains one or more non-AP STAs.
  • a multi-link device including one or more APs can be called an AP, and a multi-link device including one or more non-AP STAs can be called a Non-AP.
  • an AP may include multiple APs
  • a Non-AP may include multiple STAs
  • multiple links may be formed between the APs in the AP and the STAs in the Non-AP
  • data communication may be performed between the APs in the AP and the corresponding STAs in the Non-AP through corresponding links.
  • the AP is a device deployed in a wireless local area network to provide wireless communication functions for STA.
  • the site may include: User Equipment (UE), access terminal, user unit, user station, mobile station, mobile station, remote station, remote terminal, mobile device, wireless communication device, user agent or user device.
  • the site can also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication function, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and the embodiments of the present application are not limited to this.
  • both the station and the access point support the IEEE 802.11 standard.
  • the "indication" mentioned in the embodiments of the present application can be a direct indication, an indirect indication, or an indication of an association relationship.
  • a indicates B which can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also mean that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, and B can be obtained through C; it can also mean that there is an association relationship between A and B.
  • corresponding may indicate a direct or indirect correspondence between two items, or an association relationship between the two items, or a relationship between indication and being indicated, configuration and being configured, and the like.
  • pre-definition or “pre-configuration” can be implemented by pre-saving corresponding codes, tables or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in a device (for example, including STA and network equipment), and the present application does not limit the specific implementation method.
  • pre-definition can refer to what is defined in the protocol.
  • the "protocol” may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include a WiFi protocol and related protocols used in future WiFi communication systems, and the present application does not limit this.
  • Wireless devices support multi-band communications, for example, communicating simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, 45 GHz, and 60 GHz bands, or communicating simultaneously on different channels in the same band (or different bands), to improve communication throughput and/or reliability between devices.
  • Such devices are usually called multi-band devices, or multi-link devices (MLD), sometimes also called multi-link entities or multi-band entities.
  • Multi-link devices can be access point devices or site devices. If the multi-link device is an access point device, the multi-link device contains one or more APs; if the multi-link device is a site device, the multi-link device contains one or more non-AP STAs.
  • the non-AP MLD uses one or a combination of the following methods to obtain information about the AP MLD and each of its affiliated APs of interest:
  • Non-AP MLD and AP MLD establish multiple links by exchanging Association Request/Response frames on one of the links requested to be established, as shown in Figure 2.
  • the Association Request/Response frames carry Basic Multi-link elements for establishing multiple links.
  • Non-AP MLD indicates the multiple links requested to be established and their capabilities and operating parameters in the Association Request frame;
  • AP MLD indicates the links accepted and rejected among the multiple links requested to be established and the capabilities and operating parameters of the requested links in the Association Response frame.
  • AP MLD assigns an Association Identifier (AID) to non-AP MLD, and all subordinate STAs of non-AP MLD have the same AID (i.e., the AID assigned to non-AP MLD during the multi-link establishment process).
  • AID Association Identifier
  • non-AP MLD and AP MLD establish multiple links for multi-link operation, and non-AP MLD is associated with AP MLD.
  • the TID-to-link mapping mechanism allows the AP MLD and non-AP MLD to determine how the uplink and downlink Quality of Service (QoS) traffic corresponding to the traffic identifier (TID) value is allocated to the setup links for transmission when the multi-link setup is in progress or has been completed.
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • TID traffic identifier
  • the established link is defined as "enabled” or “enabled state”; if no TID is mapped to an established link in the uplink or downlink, the established link is defined as “disabled” or “disabled state”. Therefore, in the default mode, all established links are enabled.
  • the link can be used for the exchange of unicast frames (individually addressed frames), and corresponding to TID-to-link mapping, only the medium access control (MAC) service data unit (MSDU) or aggregate medium access control (MAC) service data unit (A-MSDU) corresponding to the TID mapped to the link can be transmitted downlink/uplink between the non-AP MLD affiliated station and the AP MLD affiliated AP corresponding to the link.
  • MAC medium access control
  • MSDU medium access control service data unit
  • A-MSDU aggregate medium access control service data unit
  • the MSDU or A-MSDU corresponding to the TID mapped to the link by TID-to-link mapping follows the channel access based on Hybrid Coordination Function (HCF) competition (such as Enhanced Distributed Channel Access (EDCA)) to perform downlink/uplink transmission between the non-AP MLD affiliated site corresponding to the link and the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • HCF Hybrid Coordination Function
  • EDCA Enhanced Distributed Channel Access
  • Unicast (individually addressed) management frames and control frames can be transmitted uplink or downlink between a non-AP MLD-affiliated station and its associated AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to any enabled link.
  • the non-AP MLD when a non-AP MLD initiates multi-link establishment with an AP MLD, as long as one of the links requested to be established corresponds to a non-AP MLD-affiliated station and an AP MLD-affiliated AP that can communicate within the reachable range, the non-AP MLD can not only obtain the information of the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the other links requested to be established, but also complete the multi-link establishment including other links requested to be established through this link that can communicate within the reachable range, even if the non-AP MLD-affiliated station and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the other links requested to be established may not be within the communication range.
  • all flow identifiers are mapped to all established links in the downlink and uplink directions, including the established links in the non-AP MLD that may not be within the communication range. Therefore, the established links in the non-AP MLD that are not within the communication range are also set to the enabled state, resulting in the actual communication state (i.e., the non-communication state) of the established link that is not within the communication range being inconsistent with the link management state (i.e., the enabled state) corresponding to the flow identifier to link mapping of the link.
  • the link management state i.e., the enabled state
  • a non-AP MLD completes multi-link establishment with an AP MLD, or a non-AP MLD is associated with an AP MLD, it is mainly based on the association at the multi-link device (MLD) level.
  • MLD multi-link device
  • the assumption premise for the establishment of the current multi-link management mechanism is that as long as a non-AP MLD subordinate station corresponding to an established link can communicate with an AP MLD subordinate AP within a reachable range, then other subordinate stations of non-AP MLDs corresponding to other established links can also communicate with other subordinate APs of AP MLD within a reachable range.
  • the present application proposes a multi-link communication solution, in which the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established; and/or the non-AP MLD manages the N links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links; and/or the AP MLD manages the N links based on the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the N established links.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP for the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, and reports relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or reports relevant information on whether the M links are enabled, so as to reflect the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, so as to ensure that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the non-AP MLD sets the enabled link in the N links where the communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable to the disabled state, or the non-AP MLD deletes the link in the N links where the communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the AP MLD sets the enabled link in the N links where communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable to the disabled state, or the AP MLD deletes the link in the N links where communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flow chart of a method 200 for multi-link communication according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3 , the method 200 for multi-link communication may include at least part of the following contents:
  • the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs and the AP MLD-affiliated APs corresponding to the M links to be established; wherein M is a positive integer.
  • the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established. That is, the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process according to the communication reachability of the links to be established, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the links is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • a "field” may also be referred to as a "field” or a "subfield.”
  • a field may occupy one or more bytes (byte/octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).
  • the embodiments of the present application are mainly aimed at the establishment and management of multiple links between AP MLD and non-AP MLD, and can also be extended to the establishment and management of multiple links between one non-AP MLD and another non-AP MLD, that is, replacing the AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application with another non-AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD may obtain information about the AP MLD and each of its subordinate APs of interest before initiating multi-link establishment with the AP MLD. That is, the non-AP MLD may obtain information about the AP MLD and information about the AP MLD subordinate APs corresponding to each of the M links before initiating multi-link establishment with the AP MLD.
  • the M links are part or all of the links that the non-AP MLD intends to establish.
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame (e.g., a beacon frame or other frame) sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • a frame e.g., a beacon frame or other frame
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame (e.g., a beacon frame or other frame) sent by another AP in the same Basic Service Set (BSS) (co-located BSS) as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • BSS Basic Service Set
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame (e.g., a beacon frame or other frame) sent by another AP in the same multiple BSSID set (BSSID) as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • a frame e.g., a beacon frame or other frame
  • BSSID multiple BSSID set
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other;
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the above S210 may specifically include:
  • the non-AP MLD sends a first association request frame through a non-AP STA attached to it;
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA in the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • the corresponding link establishment is performed, that is, the links requested to be established carried by the association request frame in the multi-link establishment include these links with determined communication reachability; for the non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA whose AP MLD affiliated AP corresponding to the proposed link is not within the reachable communication range, the corresponding link establishment is not performed, that is, the links requested to be established carried by the association request frame in the multi-link establishment do not include these links that have been determined to be unreachable.
  • non-AP MLD can also send the first association request frame through its multiple affiliated non-AP STAs, which is not limited to this in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link for the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established. That is, the links requested to be established by the non-AP MLD can reflect the actual communication status of the links. In other words, the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, thereby ensuring that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • STA1 of non-AP MLD obtains the information of AP MLD and its subordinate APs through Beacon frames and/or multi-link probe response (ML Probe Response) frames; and confirms the reachability of the links to be established (Link1, Link2, and Link3) (the reachability confirmation method is as described above), confirming that Link1 and Link2 are reachable, but Link3 is not reachable; then non-AP MLD only requests to establish Link1 and Link2, but not Link3, in initiating the association request for establishing multiple links; after non-AP MLD and AP MLD complete the association request/response interaction, Link1 and Link2 are established.
  • ML Probe Response multi-link probe response
  • the above S210 may specifically include:
  • the non-AP MLD sends a second association request frame through a non-AP STA attached to it;
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of the M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • a corresponding link is established for each subordinate site that requests to establish a link in the non-AP MLD, but when initiating multi-link establishment, the non-AP MLD indicates the reachability and/or enablement of the link requested to be established.
  • non-AP MLD can also send the second association request frame through its multiple affiliated non-AP STAs, which is not limited to this in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the non-AP MLD sends a second association request frame to request the establishment of M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established, and carries in the second association request frame: relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication and/or relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • This can reflect the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, thereby ensuring that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as reachable and/or enabled.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the corresponding reachability indication of the proposed link is "reachable” and/or the corresponding indication of the link is "enabled”; for a non-AP MLD subordinate station whose AP MLD subordinate AP corresponding to the proposed link is not within the reachable communication range, the corresponding reachability indication of the proposed link is "unreachable” and/or the corresponding indication of the link is "disabled”.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field; wherein the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication; wherein the second indication field is used to indicate whether each of the M links is enabled.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a TID-To-Link Mapping element
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multi-link element (Basic Multi-Link element);
  • the site control field (STA Control field) in the per-STA profile subelement (Per-STA Profile subelement) contained in the link information field (Link Info field) of the basic multi-link element (Basic Multi-Link element) includes a link identification (link ID) field and the first indication field (i.e., reachability field) corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the STA Control field in the Per-STA Profile subelement contained in the Link Info field of the Basic Multi-Link element may be as shown in FIG. 5 , and the STA Control field may include a reachability field.
  • the site control domain may also include the following information domains: complete configuration domain (Complete Profile), STA medium access control (MAC) address presence (STA MAC Address Present) domain, beacon interval presence (Beacon Interval Present) domain, timing synchronization function (TSF Offset Present) domain, delivery traffic indication message (DTIM) information presence (DTIM Info Present) domain, non simultaneous send and receive (NSTR Transmit and Receive, NSTR) link pair presence (NSTR Link Pair Present) domain, and BSS parameters change count presence (BSS Parameters Change Count Present) domain.
  • the reachability field occupies 1 bit. For example, when the reachability field takes 0, it indicates that the corresponding link communication is reachable, that is, the reported station is within the reachable communication range of the peer station (peer sta); when the reachability field takes 1, it indicates that the corresponding link communication is unreachable, that is, the reported station is outside the reachable communication range of the peer station (peer sta).
  • the reachability field when the reachability field takes 1, it indicates that the corresponding link communication is reachable, that is, the reported station is within the reachable communication range of the peer station (peer sta); when the reachability field takes 0, it indicates that the corresponding link communication is unreachable, that is, the reported station is outside the reachable communication range of the peer station (peer sta).
  • a proposed link when it is determined that its corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated station (set as STA i) is within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP (set as AP i) corresponding to the link, then in the flow identifier to link mapping element, it is indicated that at least one TID is mapped to the link in the uplink or downlink, that is, the link is "enabled”.
  • link Link-j when it is determined that its corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated station (set as STA j) is not within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP (set as AP j) corresponding to the link, then it is indicated in the flow identifier to link mapping element that "no TID is mapped to the link in the uplink or downlink", that is, the link is "disabled”.
  • STA1 of non-AP MLD obtains information of AP MLD and its subordinate APs through Beacon frames and/or multi-link probe response (ML Probe Response) frames; and performs reachability confirmation of the links to be established (Link1, Link2, and Link3) (the reachability confirmation method is as described above), confirming that Link1 and Link2 are reachable, but Link3 is not reachable.
  • ML Probe Response multi-link probe response
  • non-AP MLD establishes corresponding links (Link1, Link2, Link3) for each subordinate station for which a link establishment is requested, but when non-AP MLD initiates multi-link establishment, in the association request, for Link1 and Link2, their reachability indication is "reachable” and/or the link corresponding indication is “enabled", while for Link3, the reachability indication is "unreachable” and/or the link corresponding indication is "disabled”.
  • the association request/response interaction is completed between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, the establishment of Link1, Link2 and Link3 is completed.
  • FIG. 6 exemplarily shows that the association request and the association response only indicate whether it is enabled, and may also indicate whether it is reachable, or indicate both whether it is enabled and whether it is reachable.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the non-AP MLD manages the N established links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links, where N is a positive integer and N ⁇ M.
  • the non-AP MLD manages the N links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links. That is, the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link management process according to the communication reachability of the established links, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the N links are part or all of the links established by the non-AP MLD.
  • the N links may include links requested to be established by other association request frames except the first association request frame and the second association request frame mentioned above, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the non-AP MLD manages the N established links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links, including:
  • the non-AP MLD sets the enabled link among the N links, in which communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable, to a disabled state, or the non-AP MLD deletes the link among the N links, in which communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable.
  • the non-AP MLD may adopt one of the following actions:
  • the non-AP MLD initiates a TID-To-Link Mapping request to the AP MLD, and negotiates with the AP MLD to set Link-i to the "Disabled” state; or, the non-AP MLD initiates a TID-To-Link Mapping notification to the AP MLD, and sets Link-i to the "Disabled” state.
  • the non-AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration request (Link Reconfiguration Request) to the AP MLD and negotiates with the AP MLD to delete Link-i; or, the non-AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration notification to the AP MLD to delete Link-i.
  • Link Reconfiguration Request Link Reconfiguration Request
  • the manner in which the non-AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP among the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link in the N links set to the disabled state refers to a link without a flow identifier (TID) mapping.
  • the established link is defined as “enabled” or “enabled state”; if no TID is mapped to an established link in the uplink or downlink, the established link is defined as “disabled” or “disabled state”.
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD sets an enabled link among the N links in which communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable to a disabled state, for a link among the N links that is set to a disabled state due to communication unreachable between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, the non-AP MLD sets the link to an enabled state when communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is reachable.
  • the non-AP MLD sets the enabled Link-i to a disabled state; after a period of time, due to the movement of STAi or the improvement of link quality, the communication between STAi and APi may become reachable. After the communication between STAi and APi is reachable, the non-AP MLD sets Link-i to an enabled state.
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to communicate with the AP MLD-affiliated AP; or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j may be an idle timeout limit during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all may be an idle timeout limit during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the duration Tj is a periodic duration, that is, the duration Tj may be the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to the jth link.
  • the duration T j is determined or indicated by the non-AP MLD.
  • the duration T all is a periodic duration, that is, the duration T all may be the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the duration T all is determined or indicated by the non-AP MLD.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the frame type designated for indicating link enable or active status may be a protected frame, that is, only a protected frame indicates an enable or active status.
  • the frame type specified for indicating the link enablement or active state may be a protected frame and an unprotected frame, that is, both the protected frame and the unprotected frame may indicate the enablement or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: a data frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the j-th link, a Power Saving Poll (PS-Poll) frame, and a management frame.
  • PS-Poll Power Saving Poll
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through a non-AP STA affiliated with it includes S third indication fields, and the S third indication fields are respectively used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to the S links, and S is a positive integer.
  • the third indication field included in the association request frame can be used to indicate the duration T j to the AP MLD.
  • the association request frame may be the first association request frame or the second association request frame.
  • the number of third indication fields included in the association request frame may be different from the number of links requested to be established by the association request frame, that is, the non-AP MLD may indicate through the association request frame the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to some or part of the links requested to be established.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field is the maximum idle time period information field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information subfield during the link enabling period
  • the first existence field is the maximum idle time period information existence field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information existence subfield during the link enabling period.
  • the STA Control field in the Per-STA Profile subelement contained in the Link Info field of the Basic Multi-Link element may be as shown in FIG7 , and the STA Control field includes a max idle period Info for link enabled Present field.
  • the STA Control field may also include the above-mentioned reachability field, as shown in FIG8 .
  • the site control domain may also include the following information domains: a complete configuration domain (Complete Profile), a STA medium access control (MAC) address present (STA MAC Address Present) domain, a beacon interval present (Beacon Interval Present) domain, a time synchronization function (TSF Offset Present) domain, a delivery traffic indication message (DTIM) information present (DTIM Info Present) domain, a non-simultaneous transmit and receive (NSTR) link pair present (NSTR Link Pair Present) domain, and a BSS parameters change count present (BSS Parameters Change Count Present) domain.
  • a complete configuration domain Complete Profile
  • STA medium access control (MAC) address present STA MAC Address Present
  • Beacon Interval Present Beacon Interval Present
  • TDF Offset Present time synchronization function
  • DTIM delivery traffic indication message
  • DTIM Info Present DTIM Info Present
  • NSTR non-simultaneous transmit and receive
  • NSTR Link Pair Present NSTR Link Pair Present
  • the maximum idle time period information for link enabled period exists field occupies 1 bit. For example, when the maximum idle time period information for link enabled period exists field takes 0, it means that the station information field (STA Info field) in each station configuration subelement (Per-STA Profile subelement) includes the maximum idle time period information for link enabled period corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field (Link ID field) field, and when the maximum idle time period information for link enabled period exists field takes 1, it means that the station information field (STA Info field) in each station configuration subelement (Per-STA Profile subelement) does not include the maximum idle time period information for link enabled period corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field (Link ID field) field.
  • the maximum idle period information for link enabled exists field is 1, it indicates that the STA Info field in each station configuration subelement (Per-STA Profile subelement) includes the maximum idle period information for link enabled during the link period corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field (Link ID field)
  • the field (max idle period Info for link enabled) field when the maximum idle period information for link enabled exists field is 1, it indicates that the STA Info field in each station configuration subelement (Per-STA Profile subelement) includes the maximum idle period information for link enabled during the link period corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field (Link ID field)
  • the field (max idle period Info for link enabled) field when the maximum idle period information for
  • the STA Info field in the Per-STA Profile subelement included in the Link Info field of the Basic Multi-Link element may be as shown in FIG9 , and the STA Info field includes a maximum idle period Info for link enabled field.
  • the STA Info field may also include at least one of the following: a STA Info Length field, a STA MAC Address field, a Beacon Interval field, a TSF Offset field, a DTIM Info field, an NSTR Indication Bitmap field, and a BSS Parameters Change Count field.
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the duration T j is a periodic duration, that is, when the duration T j is the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link, the first subfield is the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period (max idle period for link enabled) subfield, the second subfield is the idle option subfield during the link enabling period, the first field is the Protected Keep-enabled Required field, and the second field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle period information for link enabled (max idle period Info for link enabled) field.
  • the maximum idle period information for link enabled (max idle period Info for link enabled) field may be as shown in FIG. 10, which may include a maximum idle period for link enabled (max idle period for link enabled) subfield and an idle option for link enabled subfield.
  • the idle option for link enabled subfield may be as shown in FIG. 11, which may include a protected keep-enabled required (Protected Keep-enabled Required) field and an expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the max idle period for link enabled subfield is used to indicate the idle timeout limit during link enabled, using 1000TUs as the unit; its value “0” is reserved.
  • the max idle period for link enabled information subfield is sent by the non-AP MLD to which the non-AP STA is attached: the non-AP STA shall receive at least one frame sent by the AP MLD corresponding to the attached AP to which it is associated (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement subfield) during the maximum idle period during link enabled indicated by the max idle period for link enabled subfield, before the link is considered to be maintained in the enabled state.
  • the maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement is sent by the AP MLD to which the AP is attached: within the maximum idle time period during link enablement indicated by the maximum idle time period during link enablement subfield, the AP should receive at least one frame sent by the non-AP STA corresponding to its associated non-AP MLD (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement subfield) before the link is considered to be maintained in an enabled state.
  • the non-AP STA such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement subfield
  • the Protected Keep-enabled Required field occupies 1 bit.
  • the Protected Keep-enabled Required field takes 1 to indicate that only the protected frame indicates an enabled or active state
  • the Protected Keep-enabled Required field takes 0 to indicate that both the protected frame and the non-protected frame can indicate an enabled or active state.
  • the Protected Keep-enabled Required field takes 0 to indicate that only the protected frame indicates an enabled or active state
  • the Protected Keep-enabled Required field takes 1 to indicate that both the protected frame and the non-protected frame can indicate an enabled or active state.
  • the maximum idle time period information field during link enablement is sent by the non-AP MLD to which the non-AP STA is attached, and the Protected Keep-enabled Required field is used to indicate the frame requirement of the associated AP to the non-AP STA.
  • the maximum idle time period information field during link enablement is sent by the AP MLD to which the AP is attached, and the Protected Keep-enabled Required field is used to indicate the frame requirement of the associated non-AP STA to the AP.
  • the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time occupies 1 bit.
  • the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time takes 0 to indicate that when the duration of any frame sent by the peer site (meeting the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enable required subfield) not received on the corresponding link is equal to or exceeds the time indicated by the "maximum idle time period during link enablement" subfield, the link is expected to be set to "disabled”; the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time takes 1 to indicate that when the duration of any frame sent by the peer site (meeting the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enable required subfield) not received on the corresponding link is equal to or exceeds the time indicated by the "maximum idle time period during link enablement" subfield, the link is expected to be deleted.
  • the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time is 1, indicating that when the duration of not receiving any frame sent by the peer site on the corresponding link (meeting the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enable requirement subfield) is equal to or exceeds the time indicated by the "maximum idle time period during link enablement" subfield, the link is expected to be set to "disabled”; the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time is 0, indicating that when the duration of not receiving any frame sent by the peer site on the corresponding link (meeting the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enable requirement subfield) is equal to or exceeds the time indicated by the "maximum idle time period during link enablement" subfield, the link is expected to be deleted.
  • the expected behavior for exceeding the maximum space time field indicates that the non-AP MLD does not receive any frame (meeting the frame requirement indicated by the protected maintenance enable required subfield) sent by the peer station of the link (i.e., the corresponding AP) on the corresponding link to which the maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement is applied for a duration equal to or greater than the time indicated by the "maximum idle time period during link enablement" subfield, and the expected behavior is to be performed.
  • the expected behavior for exceeding the maximum space time field indicates that the AP MLD does not receive any frame (meeting the frame requirement indicated by the protected maintenance enable required subfield) sent by the peer station of the link (i.e., the corresponding non-AP STA) on the corresponding link to which the maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement is applied for a duration equal to or greater than the time indicated by the "maximum idle time period during link enablement" subfield, and the expected behavior is to be performed.
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through one of its affiliated non-AP STAs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the fourth indication field included in the association request frame can be used to indicate the duration T all to the AP MLD.
  • the association request frame may be the first association request frame or the second association request frame.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field is the maximum idle time period information field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information subfield during the link enabling period
  • the second existence field is the maximum idle time period information existence field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information existence subfield during the link enabling period.
  • the Presence Bitmap subfield of the Multi-Link Control field of the Basic Multi-Link element may be as shown in FIG. 12 , where the Presence Bitmap subfield includes a max idle period Info for link enabled Present field.
  • the presence bitmap subdomain may also include the following information domains: link identification information presence (Link ID Info Present) domain, BSS parameter change count presence (BSS Parameters Change Count Present) domain, medium synchronization delay information presence (Medium Synchronization Delay Information Present) domain, Enhanced Multi-Link (Enhanced Multi-Link, EML) capability presence (EML Capabilities Present) domain, MLD capabilities and operations presence (MLD Capabilities and Operations Present) domain, and AP MLD identification presence domain.
  • the Common Info field in the Multi-Link Control field of the Basic Multi-Link element may be as shown in FIG. 13, and the Common Info field includes a maximum idle period Info for link enabled field. As shown in FIG. 13, the Common Info field may also include at least one of the following: a Common Info Length field, an MLD MAC Address field, a Link ID Info field, a BSS Parameters Change Count field, a Medium Synchronization Delay Information field, an EML Capabilities field, an MLD Capabilities and Operations field, and an AP MLD Identifier field.
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element is unreachable.
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is the protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the duration T j is a periodic duration, that is, the duration T all can be the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period (max idle period for link enabled) subfield
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during the link enabling period
  • the third field is the Protected Keep-enabled Required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the format of the third sub-domain can be the same as the format of the above-mentioned first sub-domain
  • the format of the fourth sub-domain can be the same as the format of the above-mentioned second sub-domain
  • the format of the third field can be the same as the format of the above-mentioned first field
  • the format of the fourth field can be the same as the format of the above-mentioned second field, which will not be repeated here.
  • a subordinate non-AP STA of a non-AP MLD includes a maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement in the per-site configuration sub-element of the multi-link element carried in the association request frame, then the values of each subfield in the maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement are applied to the link corresponding to the per-site configuration sub-element (i.e., identified by the carried Link ID); if a subordinate non-AP STA of a non-AP MLD includes a maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement in the general information field of the multi-link element carried in the association request frame, then the values of each subfield in the maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement are applied to all links indicated by the multi-link element or the link where the sending multi-link element is located.
  • the non-AP STA corresponding to the link should receive at least one frame (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement required subfield (if any) indicated by the subfield) sent by the subordinate AP corresponding to the AP MLD to which it is associated (that is, the AP corresponding to the link) within the maximum idle period during the link enablement indicated by the subfield, before the link can be considered to be maintained in an enabled state.
  • a frame such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link
  • the non-AP MLD before initiating multi-link establishment with the AP MLD, obtains information about the AP MLD and each subordinate AP of interest.
  • the basic multi-link element in the association request frame carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" for requesting to establish a link, which is used to indicate that for the corresponding link, within the maximum idle period during the link enablement period, the corresponding non-AP STA should receive at least one frame sent by the subordinate AP corresponding to the AP MLD to which it is associated (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meets the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement required subfield) before the link is considered to be maintained in an enabled state.
  • the basic multi-link element of AP MLD in the association response frame also carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" requesting to establish a link, which is used to indicate that the Non-AP station should send at least one frame to maintain the link enablement state to its associated AP within the maximum idle period during the link enablement period indicated by this subfield (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement subfield) to maintain the link in the enabled state.
  • this subfield such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement subfield
  • the non-AP MLD after completing the establishment of multiple links, for the non-AP MLD, for the enabled link (i.e., Enabled Link, set to Link-i), when the non-AP MLD affiliated station (set to STAi) corresponding to Link-i does not receive any frame sent by the AP MLD affiliated station (set to APi) corresponding to Link-i during the corresponding "maximum idle time period during link enablement (sent by the non-AP MLD)" (in the case where there is no frame type requirement) or does not receive a frame of a specified type sent by APi (in the case where there is a frame type requirement), the non-AP MLD initiates a flow identifier to link mapping (TID-To-Link Mapping) request to the AP MLD, and negotiates with the AP MLD to set Link-i to the "disabled" state; or, the non-AP MLD initiates a flow identifier to link mapping notification to the AP MLD, and sets Link-i to the
  • non-AP MLD before initiating multi-link establishment with AP MLD, obtains information about AP MLD and each subordinate AP it is interested in.
  • the basic multi-link element in the association request frame carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" for requesting to establish a link, that is, the maximum idle time period T1 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG14; at the same time, the basic multi-link element in the association response frame of AP MLD also carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" (optional) for requesting to establish a link, that is, the maximum idle time period T2 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG14.
  • the non-AP MLD After completing the multi-link establishment, for the enabled link Link3, when it starts to be enabled, if STA3 does not receive any frame sent by AP3 during the corresponding "maximum idle time period during link enablement" (i.e. T1 in Figure 14) (no frame type requirement) or does not receive the specified type of frame sent by AP3 during the T1 period (with frame type requirement), the non-AP MLD initiates a flow identifier to link mapping (TID-To-Link Mapping) request through Link1, and negotiates with the non-AP MLD to set Link3 to the "Disabled" state.
  • T1 maximum idle time period during link enablement
  • non-AP MLD for non-AP MLD, for an enabled link (i.e., Enabled Link, set as Link-i)
  • an enabled link i.e., Enabled Link, set as Link-i
  • the non-AP MLD subordinate station set as STAi
  • APi AP MLD subordinate station
  • Link-i link reconfiguration request
  • the non-AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration request (Link Reconfiguration Request) to the AP MLD and negotiates with the AP MLD to delete Link-i; or, the non-AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration notification to the AP MLD to delete Link-i.
  • non-AP MLD has other enabled links
  • the non-AP MLD is kept associated with the AP MLD. For example, as shown in FIG15, before initiating multi-link establishment with AP MLD, non-AP MLD obtains information about AP MLD and each subordinate AP of interest.
  • the basic multi-link element in the association request frame carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" for requesting to establish the link, i.e., the maximum idle time period T1 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG15; at the same time, the basic multi-link element in the association response frame of AP MLD also carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement” (optional) for requesting to establish the link, i.e., the maximum idle time period T2 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG15.
  • the non-AP MLD After completing the establishment of multiple links, for the enabled link Link3, when it starts to be enabled, if STA3 does not receive any frame sent by AP3 in the corresponding "maximum idle time period during link enablement" (T1 in Figure 15) (no frame type requirement) or does not receive the specified type of frame sent by AP3 in the T1 period (with frame type requirement), then the non-AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration request (Link Reconfiguration Request) through Link1, and negotiates with the AP MLD to delete Link3. Since there are still enabled links Link1 and Link2, the non-AP MLD maintains the status of being associated with the AP MLD.
  • Link Reconfiguration Request link reconfiguration request
  • the maximum idle time period T2 during the link enablement period is greater than the maximum idle time period T1 during the link enablement period.
  • the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established; and/or the non-AP MLD manages the N links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links. This ensures that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP for the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, and reports relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or reports relevant information on whether the M links are enabled, so as to reflect the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, so as to ensure that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the non-AP MLD sets the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and AP MLD-affiliated AP in the N links where communication is unreachable to the non-AP MLD to a disabled state, or the non-AP MLD deletes the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and AP MLD-affiliated AP in the N links where communication is unreachable, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic flow chart of a method 300 for multi-link communication according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 16 , the method 300 for multi-link communication may include at least part of the following contents:
  • AP MLD receives a first association request frame or a second association request frame through an AP affiliated with it; wherein the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP; wherein the second association request frame is used to request to establish M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or, the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled; wherein M is a positive integer.
  • the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established.
  • the non-AP MLD sends the first association request frame or the second association request frame based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established. That is, the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, thereby ensuring that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • a "field” may also be referred to as a "field” or a "subfield.”
  • a field may occupy one or more bytes (byte/octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).
  • the embodiments of the present application are mainly aimed at the establishment and management of multiple links between AP MLD and non-AP MLD, and can also be extended to the establishment and management of multiple links between one non-AP MLD and another non-AP MLD, that is, replacing the AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application with another non-AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame (e.g., a beacon frame or other frame) sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • a frame e.g., a beacon frame or other frame
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame (e.g., a beacon frame or other frame) sent by another AP in the same Basic Service Set (BSS) (co-located BSS) as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • BSS Basic Service Set
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame (e.g., a beacon frame or other frame) sent by another AP in the same multiple BSSID set (e.g., a beacon frame or other frame) as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time, the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other;
  • a frame e.g., a beacon frame or other frame
  • a multiple BSSID set e.g., a beacon frame or other frame
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the first association request frame is determined based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD affiliated APs.
  • the corresponding link establishment is performed, that is, the links requested to be established carried by the association request frame in the multi-link establishment include these links with determined communication reachability; for the non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA whose AP MLD affiliated AP corresponding to the proposed link is not within the reachable communication range, the corresponding link establishment is not performed, that is, the links requested to be established carried by the association request frame in the multi-link establishment do not include these links that have been determined to be unreachable.
  • non-AP MLD can also send the first association request frame through its multiple affiliated non-AP STAs, which is not limited to this in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP for the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA in the M links, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established. That is, the links requested to be established by the non-AP MLD can reflect the actual communication status of the links. In other words, the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, thereby ensuring that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • STA1 of non-AP MLD obtains the information of AP MLD and its subordinate APs through Beacon frames and/or multi-link probe response (ML Probe Response) frames; and confirms the reachability of the links to be established (Link1, Link2, and Link3) (the reachability confirmation method is as described above), confirming that Link1 and Link2 are reachable, but Link3 is not reachable; then non-AP MLD only requests to establish Link1 and Link2, but not Link3, in initiating the association request for establishing multiple links; after non-AP MLD and AP MLD complete the association request/response interaction, Link1 and Link2 are established.
  • ML Probe Response multi-link probe response
  • the second association request frame is determined based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • a corresponding link is established for each subordinate site that requests to establish a link in the non-AP MLD, but when initiating multi-link establishment, the non-AP MLD indicates the reachability and/or enablement of the link requested to be established.
  • non-AP MLD can also send the second association request frame through its multiple affiliated non-AP STAs, which is not limited to this in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the non-AP MLD sends a second association request frame to request the establishment of M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established, and carries in the second association request frame: relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication and/or relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • This can reflect the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, thereby ensuring that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as reachable and/or enabled.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the corresponding reachability indication of the proposed link is "reachable” and/or the corresponding indication of the link is "enabled”; for a non-AP MLD subordinate station whose AP MLD subordinate AP corresponding to the proposed link is not within the reachable communication range, the corresponding reachability indication of the proposed link is "unreachable” and/or the corresponding indication of the link is "disabled”.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field; wherein the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication; wherein the second indication field is used to indicate whether each of the M links is enabled.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a TID-To-Link Mapping element
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and the first indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the format of the second association request frame may refer to the relevant description of FIG. 5 in the multi-link communication method 200, and will not be repeated here.
  • STA1 of non-AP MLD obtains information of AP MLD and its subordinate APs through Beacon frames and/or multi-link probe response (ML Probe Response) frames; and performs reachability confirmation of the links to be established (Link1, Link2, and Link3) (the reachability confirmation method is as described above), confirming that Link1 and Link2 are reachable, but Link3 is not reachable.
  • ML Probe Response multi-link probe response
  • non-AP MLD establishes corresponding links (Link1, Link2, Link3) for each subordinate station for which a link establishment is requested, but when non-AP MLD initiates multi-link establishment, in the association request, for Link1 and Link2, their reachability indication is "reachable” and/or the link corresponding indication is “enabled", while for Link3, the reachability indication is "unreachable” and/or the link corresponding indication is "disabled”.
  • the association request/response interaction is completed between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, the establishment of Link1, Link2 and Link3 is completed.
  • FIG. 6 exemplarily shows that the association request and the association response only indicate whether it is enabled, and may also indicate whether it is reachable, or indicate both whether it is enabled and whether it is reachable.
  • the embodiment of the present application is not limited to this.
  • the AP MLD manages the N established links based on the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to each of the N established links, where N is a positive integer and N ⁇ M.
  • the AP MLD manages the N links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the N established links. That is, the AP MLD can optimize the multi-link management process according to the communication reachability of the established links, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the N links are part or all of the links established by the AP MLD.
  • the AP MLD manages the N links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to the N established links, including:
  • the AP MLD sets the enabled link among the N links, in which communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable, to a disabled state, or the AP MLD deletes the link among the N links, in which communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable.
  • the AP MLD may adopt one of the following actions:
  • the AP MLD initiates a TID-To-Link Mapping request to the non-AP MLD, and negotiates with the non-AP MLD to set Link-i to the "Disabled” state; or, the AP MLD initiates a TID-To-Link Mapping notification to the non-AP MLD, and sets Link-i to the "Disabled” state.
  • AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration request (Link Reconfiguration Request) to the non-AP MLD and negotiates with the non-AP MLD to delete Link-i; or, AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration notification to the non-AP MLD to delete Link-i.
  • Link Reconfiguration Request Link Reconfiguration Request
  • the manner in which the AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs in the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link in the N links that is set to the disabled state refers to a link without a flow identifier (TID) mapping.
  • TID flow identifier
  • the established link is defined as “enabled” or “enabled state”; if no TID is mapped to an established link in the uplink or downlink, the established link is defined as “disabled” or “disabled state”.
  • the AP MLD when the AP MLD sets an enabled link among the N links in which communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable to a disabled state, for a link among the N links that is set to a disabled state due to communication unreachable between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA, the AP MLD sets the link to an enabled state when communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is reachable.
  • AP MLD sets the enabled Link-i to a disabled state; after a period of time, due to the movement of STAi or the improvement of link quality, communication between STAi and APi may become reachable. After communication between STAi and APi is reachable, AP MLD sets Link-i to an enabled state.
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA can communicate with each other; or,
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA are reachable in communication;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j ′ may be an idle timeout limit during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all ′ may be an idle timeout limit during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the duration T j ′ is a periodic duration, that is, the duration T j ′ may be a maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to the jth link.
  • the duration T j ′ is determined or indicated by the AP MLD.
  • the duration T all ′ is a periodic duration, that is, the duration T all ′ may be the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the duration T all ′ is determined or indicated by the AP MLD.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the frame type designated for indicating link enable or active status may be a protected frame, that is, only a protected frame indicates an enable or active status.
  • the frame type specified for indicating the link enablement or active state may be a protected frame and an unprotected frame, that is, both the protected frame and the unprotected frame may indicate the enablement or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes but is not limited to at least one of the following: a data frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the j-th link, a Power Saving Poll (PS-Poll) frame, and a management frame.
  • PS-Poll Power Saving Poll
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through an AP affiliated with it includes S′ third indication fields, and the S′ third indication fields are respectively used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to the S′ links; wherein the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for multi-link establishment, and S′ is a positive integer.
  • the third indication field included in the association response frame may be used to indicate the duration T j ′ to the non-AP MLD.
  • the association response frame may be an association response frame for the first association request frame, or may be an association response frame for the second association request frame.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field is the maximum idle time period information field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information subfield during the link enabling period
  • the first existence field is the maximum idle time period information existence field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information existence subfield during the link enabling period.
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the duration T j ′ is a periodic duration, that is, when the duration T j ′ is the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link, the first subfield is the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period (max idle period for link enabled) subfield, the second subfield is the idle option subfield during the link enabling period, the first field is the Protected Keep-enabled Required field, and the second field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through one of its affiliated APs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for multi-link establishment.
  • the fourth indication field included in the association response frame may be used to indicate the duration T all ′ to the AP MLD.
  • the association response frame may be an association response frame corresponding to the first association request frame, or may be an association response frame corresponding to the second association request frame.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field is the maximum idle time period information field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information subfield during the link enabling period
  • the second existence field is the maximum idle time period information existence field during the link enabling period or the maximum idle time period information existence subfield during the link enabling period.
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA cannot communicate.
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is the protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the duration T j ′ is a periodic duration
  • the duration T all ′ may be the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time period during the link enabling period (max idle period for link enabled) subfield
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during the link enabling period
  • the third field is the Protected Keep-enabled Required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field for exceeding the maximum space time.
  • a subordinate AP of AP MLD includes a maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement in the per-site configuration sub-element of the multi-link element carried in the association response frame
  • the values of each subfield in the maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement are applied to the link corresponding to the per-site configuration sub-element (i.e., identified by the carried Link ID);
  • a subordinate AP of AP MLD includes a maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement in the general information field of the multi-link element carried in the association response frame, the values of each subfield in the maximum idle time period information subfield during link enablement are applied to all links indicated by the multi-link element or the link where the sending multi-link element is located.
  • the Non-AP station corresponding to the link should send at least one frame for maintaining the enabled state of the link to its associated AP (i.e., the AP corresponding to the link) within the maximum idle period during the link enablement period indicated by the subfield (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement subfield (if any) indicated by the subfield), before the link is considered to be maintained in an enabled state.
  • the subfield such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link
  • the basic multi-link element of the AP MLD in the association response frame also carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" requesting to establish a link, which is used to indicate that the Non-AP station should send at least one frame to maintain the link enablement state to the AP it is associated with within the maximum idle period during the link enablement period indicated by the sub-field (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement sub-field) to maintain the link in the enabled state.
  • the sub-field such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, meet the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement requirement sub-field
  • the non-AP MLD obtains information about the AP MLD and each of its affiliated APs of interest before initiating multi-link establishment with the AP MLD.
  • the basic multi-link element in the association request frame carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" of the link establishment request, which is used to indicate that for the corresponding link, within the maximum idle period during the link enablement period, its corresponding non-AP STA should receive at least one frame sent by the AP MLD corresponding to its associated AP (such as a data frame, PS-Poll frame, or management frame corresponding to the TID mapped to the link, and at the same time, it meets the frame requirements indicated by the protected maintenance enablement required subfield) before the link is considered to be maintained in an enabled state.
  • the AP MLD for the AP MLD, for the enabled link (i.e., Enabled Link, set as Link-i) established between it and the non-AP MLD, when the AP MLD subordinate station (set as APi) corresponding to Link-i does not receive any frame sent by the Non-AP MLD subordinate station (set as STAi) corresponding to Link-i within the corresponding "maximum idle time period during link enablement (sent by the AP MLD)" (in the case where there is no frame type requirement) or does not receive a frame of a specified type sent by STAi (in the case where there is a frame type requirement), then the AP MLD initiates a flow identifier to link mapping (TID-To-Link Mapping) request to the non-AP MLD, and negotiates with the non-AP MLD to set Link-i to the "disabled" state; or, the AP MLD initiates a flow identifier to link mapping notification to the non-AP MLD, and sets Link-
  • non-AP MLD before initiating multi-link establishment with AP MLD, obtains information about AP MLD and each subordinate AP it is interested in.
  • the basic multi-link element in the association request frame carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" (optional) for requesting to establish a link, i.e., the maximum idle time period T1 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG17 ; at the same time, the basic multi-link element in the association response frame of AP MLD also carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" for requesting to establish a link, i.e., the maximum idle time period T2 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG17 .
  • AP MLD After completing the multi-link establishment, for AP MLD, when the enabled link Link3 starts to be enabled, if AP3 does not receive any frame sent by STA3 during the corresponding "maximum idle time period during link enablement" (T2 in the figure) (no frame type requirement) or does not receive the specified type of frame sent by STA3 during the T2 period (with frame type requirement), then AP MLD initiates a flow identifier to link mapping (TID-To-Link Mapping) request through Link1, and negotiates with the non-AP MLD to set Link3 to the "Disabled" state.
  • T2 maximum idle time period during link enablement
  • an enabled link i.e., Enabled Link, set as Link-i
  • an enabled link i.e., Enabled Link, set as Link-i
  • the AP MLD subordinate station set as APi
  • STAi link-i
  • Link-i link reconfiguration request
  • the AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration request (Link Reconfiguration Request) to the non-AP MLD and negotiates with the non-AP MLD to delete Link-i; or, the AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration notification to the non-AP MLD to delete Link-i.
  • non-AP MLD has other enabled links
  • the non-AP MLD remains associated with the AP MLD. For example, as shown in FIG18, before initiating multi-link establishment with AP MLD, non-AP MLD obtains information about AP MLD and each subordinate AP of interest.
  • the basic multi-link element in the association request frame carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement" (optional) for requesting to establish the link, i.e., the maximum idle time period T1 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG18; at the same time, the basic multi-link element in the association response frame of AP MLD also carries the "maximum idle time period information during link enablement” for requesting to establish the link, i.e., the maximum idle time period T2 during the link enablement corresponding to link 3 in FIG18.
  • AP3 After completing the establishment of multiple links, for the enabled link Link3, when it starts to be enabled, if AP3 does not receive any frame sent by STA3 during the corresponding "maximum idle time period during link enablement" (T2 in Figure 18) (no frame type requirement) or does not receive the specified type of frame sent by STA3 during the T2 period (with frame type requirement), then AP MLD initiates a link reconfiguration request (Link Reconfiguration Request) through Link1, and negotiates with the non-AP MLD to delete Link3. Since there are still enabled links Link1 and Link2, the non-AP MLD maintains the status of being associated with AP MLD.
  • Link Reconfiguration Request link reconfiguration request
  • the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established; and/or the AP MLD manages the N links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the N established links. This ensures that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP for the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, and reports relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or reports relevant information on whether the M links are enabled, so as to reflect the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, so as to ensure that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the AP MLD sets the corresponding unreachable link between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA in the N links to a disabled state, or the AP MLD deletes the corresponding unreachable link between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA in the N links, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic flow chart of a multi-link communication method 400 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 19 , the multi-link communication method 400 may include at least part of the following contents:
  • the non-AP MLD manages the N established links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs and the AP MLD-affiliated APs corresponding to each of the N links, where N is a positive integer.
  • the non-AP MLD manages the N established links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links, including:
  • the non-AP MLD sets the enabled link among the N links, in which communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable, to a disabled state, or the non-AP MLD deletes the link among the N links, in which communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable.
  • the manner in which the non-AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP among the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link among the N links set to the disabled state refers to a link without flow identifier TID mapping.
  • the method when the non-AP MLD sets the enabled link corresponding to the N links, in which communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable, to a disabled state, the method further includes:
  • the non-AP MLD For a link among the N links that is set to a disabled state due to unreachable communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, the non-AP MLD sets the link to an enabled state when communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is reachable.
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to communicate with the AP MLD-affiliated AP; or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j is a periodic duration, and/or the duration T all is a periodic duration.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes at least one of:
  • the data frame corresponding to the TID of the j-th link is mapped, the energy-saving polling PS-Poll frame, and the management frame.
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through a non-AP STA affiliated with it includes S third indication fields, and the S third indication fields are respectively used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to the S links, and S is a positive integer.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through one of its affiliated non-AP STAs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element is unreachable.
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is the protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the non-AP MLD before the non-AP MLD manages the N links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N links, the non-AP MLD initiates multi-link establishment with the AP MLD based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established, where M is a positive integer and M ⁇ N.
  • the non-AP MLD initiates establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs and the AP MLD-affiliated APs corresponding to the M links to be established, including:
  • the non-AP MLD sends a first association request frame through a non-AP STA attached to it;
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA in the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • the non-AP MLD initiates establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs and the AP MLD-affiliated APs corresponding to the M links to be established, including:
  • the non-AP MLD sends a second association request frame through a non-AP STA attached to it;
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of the M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication reachable and/or enabled
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field; wherein the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication; wherein the second indication field is respectively used to indicate whether each of the M links is enabled.
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and the first indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a flow identifier to link mapping element
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP are reachable for communication;
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same basic service set BSS as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same multiple basic service set identifier BSSID set as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the i-th proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other;
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the non-AP MLD manages N links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links; and/or the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established. This ensures that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP for the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, and reports relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or reports relevant information on whether the M links are enabled, so as to reflect the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, so as to ensure that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the non-AP MLD sets the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and AP MLD-affiliated AP in the N links where communication is unreachable to the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and AP MLD-affiliated AP to a disabled state, or the non-AP MLD deletes the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and AP MLD-affiliated AP in the N links where communication is unreachable, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • FIG. 20 is a schematic flow chart of a multi-link communication method 500 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 20 , the multi-link communication method 500 may include at least part of the following contents:
  • AP MLD manages the N established links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-access point stations non-AP STAs corresponding to each of the N established links, where N is a positive integer.
  • the AP MLD manages the N links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to the N established links, including:
  • the AP MLD sets the enabled link among the N links that is unreachable for communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA to a disabled state, or the AP MLD deletes the link among the N links that is unreachable for communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA.
  • the manner in which the AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs in the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link in the N links that is set to the disabled state refers to a link without flow identifier TID mapping.
  • the method when the AP MLD sets the enabled link in the N links that is unreachable between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA to a disabled state, the method further includes:
  • the AP MLD For a link among the N links that is set to a disabled state due to unreachable communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA, the AP MLD sets the link to an enabled state if communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is reachable.
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA can communicate with each other; or,
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA are reachable in communication;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j ′ is a periodic duration, and/or the duration T all ′ is a periodic duration.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes at least one of:
  • the data frame corresponding to the flow identifier TID of the j-th link, the energy-saving polling PS-Poll frame, and the management frame are mapped.
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through an AP affiliated with it includes S′ third indication fields, and the S′ third indication fields are respectively used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to the S′ links; wherein the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for multi-link establishment, and S′ is a positive integer.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through one of its affiliated APs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for multi-link establishment.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA cannot communicate.
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is the protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the AP MLD before the AP MLD manages the N links according to communication reachabilities between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to the N links, the AP MLD receives a first association request frame through one of its affiliated APs;
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA among the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • the AP MLD before the AP MLD manages the N links according to communication reachabilities between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to the N links, the AP MLD receives a second association request frame through one of its affiliated APs;
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication reachable and/or enabled
  • the corresponding indication of the proposed link is that communication is unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field;
  • the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication;
  • the second indication field is used to indicate whether each link in the M links is enabled.
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multi-link element; wherein the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and the first indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a flow identifier to link mapping element
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP are reachable for communication;
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same basic service set BSS as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same multiple basic service set identifier BSSID set as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the i-th proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link can communicate with the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the AP MLD manages N links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to the N established links; and/or the non-AP MLD initiates the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs and the AP MLD-affiliated APs corresponding to the M links to be established. This ensures that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish a link of the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the M links to be established within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP, based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established.
  • the non-AP MLD requests to establish M links based on the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established, and reports relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or reports relevant information on whether the M links are enabled, thereby reflecting the actual communication status of the links.
  • the non-AP MLD can optimize the multi-link establishment process based on the communication reachability of the links to be established, thereby ensuring that the actual communication status of the links is consistent with the link enablement status.
  • the AP MLD sets the corresponding unreachable link between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA in the N links to a disabled state, or the AP MLD deletes the corresponding unreachable link between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA in the N links, thereby ensuring that the actual communication state of the link is consistent with the link enablement state.
  • FIG21 shows a schematic block diagram of a non-AP MLD 600 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the non-AP MLD 600 includes:
  • the communication unit 610 is used to initiate the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to the communication reachability between the non-AP STA affiliated with the AP MLD and the access point AP affiliated with the access point multi-link device AP MLD corresponding to each of the M links to be established; wherein M is a positive integer.
  • the communication unit 610 is specifically used to:
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA in the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • the communication unit 610 is specifically used to:
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of the M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication reachable and/or enabled
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field;
  • the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication;
  • the second indication field is used to indicate whether each link in the M links is enabled.
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and the first indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a flow identifier to link mapping element
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP are reachable for communication;
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same basic service set BSS as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same multiple basic service set identifier BSSID set as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the i-th proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other;
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the non-AP MLD 600 further includes:
  • the processing unit 620 is used to manage the N established links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD affiliated AP corresponding to each of the N established links, where N is a positive integer and N ⁇ M.
  • the processing unit 620 is specifically configured to:
  • the manner in which the non-AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP among the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link among the N links set to the disabled state refers to a link without flow identifier TID mapping.
  • the processing unit 620 when the non-AP MLD sets the enabled link among the N links in which communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable to a non-AP state, for the link among the N links that is set to the disabled state due to unreachable communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, when communication between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is reachable, the processing unit 620 is further used to set the link to the enabled state.
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to communicate with the AP MLD-affiliated AP; or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j is a periodic duration, and/or the duration T all is a periodic duration.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes at least one of:
  • the data frame corresponding to the TID of the j-th link is mapped, the energy-saving polling PS-Poll frame, and the management frame.
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through a non-AP STA affiliated with it includes S third indication fields, and the S third indication fields are respectively used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to the S links, and S is a positive integer.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through one of its affiliated non-AP STAs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element is unreachable.
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is the protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input/output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip.
  • the processing unit may be one or more processors.
  • non-AP MLD 600 may correspond to the non-AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the non-AP MLD 600 are respectively for realizing the corresponding process of the non-AP MLD in the method 200 shown in Figure 3, which will not be repeated here for the sake of brevity.
  • FIG22 shows a schematic block diagram of an access point multi-link device AP MLD 700 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the AP MLD 700 includes:
  • the communication unit 710 is configured to receive a first association request frame or a second association request frame through an access point AP to which it is attached;
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD-affiliated non-access point station non-AP STA corresponding to the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled;
  • M is a positive integer.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication reachable and/or enabled
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field;
  • the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication;
  • the second indication field is used to indicate whether each link in the M links is enabled.
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and the first indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a flow identifier to link mapping element
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time, the communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is reachable; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same basic service set BSS as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same multiple basic service set identifier BSSID set as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the i-th proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other;
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the AP MLD 700 further includes:
  • the processing unit 720 is used to manage the N established links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to each of the N established links, where N is a positive integer and N ⁇ M.
  • the processing unit 720 is specifically configured to:
  • the manner in which the AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs in the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link in the N links that is set to the disabled state refers to a link without flow identifier TID mapping.
  • the method when the AP MLD sets the enabled link in the N links that is unreachable between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA to a disabled state, the method further includes:
  • the AP MLD For a link among the N links that is set to a disabled state due to unreachable communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA, the AP MLD sets the link to an enabled state if communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is reachable.
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA can communicate with each other; or,
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA are reachable in communication;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j ′ is a periodic duration, and/or the duration T all ′ is a periodic duration.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes at least one of:
  • the data frame corresponding to the flow identifier TID of the j-th link, the energy-saving polling PS-Poll frame, and the management frame are mapped.
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through an AP affiliated thereto includes S′ third indication fields, and the S′ third indication fields are respectively used to indicate maximum idle time information during link enabling periods corresponding to the S′ links;
  • the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for establishing multiple links, and S′ is a positive integer.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through one of its affiliated APs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for multi-link establishment.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA cannot communicate.
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is the protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input/output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip.
  • the processing unit may be one or more processors.
  • the AP MLD 700 may correspond to the AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 700 are respectively for realizing the corresponding process of the AP MLD in the method 300 shown in Figure 16, which will not be repeated here for the sake of brevity.
  • FIG23 shows a schematic block diagram of a non-AP MLD 800 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the non-AP MLD 800 includes:
  • the processing unit 810 is used to manage the N established links according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the access point multi-link device AP MLD-affiliated access point AP corresponding to each of the N established links, where N is a positive integer.
  • processing unit 810 is specifically configured to:
  • the manner in which the non-AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP among the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link among the N links set to the disabled state refers to a link without flow identifier TID mapping.
  • the processing unit 810 when the non-AP MLD sets the enabled link among the N links whose corresponding communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable to a non-AP state, for the link among the N links that is set to the non-enabled state due to the unreachable communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP, when the communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is reachable, the processing unit 810 is further used to set the link to the enabled state.
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to communicate with the AP MLD-affiliated AP; or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all , the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link is reachable to the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j is a periodic duration, and/or the duration T all is a periodic duration.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes at least one of:
  • the data frame corresponding to the TID of the j-th link is mapped, the energy-saving polling PS-Poll frame, and the management frame.
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through a non-AP STA affiliated with it includes S third indication fields, and the S third indication fields are respectively used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to the S links, and S is a positive integer.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the association request frame for multi-link establishment sent by the non-AP MLD through one of its affiliated non-AP STAs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the association request frame for multilink establishment includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the non-AP MLD when communication between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element is unreachable.
  • the third subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is a protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is an expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the non-AP MLD 800 before the non-AP MLD manages the N links according to communication reachabilities between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs and the AP MLD-affiliated APs corresponding to the N links, the non-AP MLD 800 further includes:
  • the communication unit 810 is used to initiate the establishment of multiple links with the AP MLD according to the communication reachability between the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA and the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to each of the M links to be established, where M is a positive integer and M ⁇ N.
  • the communication unit 810 is specifically used to:
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA in the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • the communication unit 810 is specifically used to:
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of the M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication reachable and/or enabled
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field;
  • the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication;
  • the second indication field is used to indicate whether each link in the M links is enabled.
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and the first indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a flow identifier to link mapping element
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP are reachable for communication;
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same basic service set BSS as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same multiple basic service set identifier BSSID set as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the i-th proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other;
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input/output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip.
  • the processing unit may be one or more processors.
  • non-AP MLD 800 may correspond to the non-AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the non-AP MLD 800 are respectively for realizing the corresponding process of the non-AP MLD in the method 400 shown in Figure 19, which will not be repeated here for the sake of brevity.
  • FIG24 shows a schematic block diagram of an access point multi-link device AP MLD 900 according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the AP MLD 900 includes:
  • the processing unit 910 is used to manage the N established links according to the communication reachability between the AP MLD-affiliated access point AP and the non-AP multi-link device non-AP MLD-affiliated non-access point station non-AP STA corresponding to each of the N established links, where N is a positive integer.
  • processing unit 910 is specifically configured to:
  • the manner in which the AP MLD handles the unreachable links between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs in the N links is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD.
  • the link in the N links that is set to the disabled state refers to a link without flow identifier TID mapping.
  • the processing unit 910 when the AP MLD sets the enabled link among the N links whose corresponding communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable to a disabled state, for the link among the N links that is set to the disabled state due to the unreachable communication between the corresponding AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA, when communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the link is reachable, the processing unit 910 is further used to set the link to the enabled state.
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the time length T j ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA can communicate with each other; or,
  • the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link receives at least one frame sent by the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the j-th link within the duration T all ′, the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the j-th link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA are reachable in communication;
  • the j-th link is the j-th link among all established links
  • the duration T j ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to the j-th link
  • the duration T all ′ is the maximum idle time during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links
  • j is a positive integer.
  • the duration T j ′ is a periodic duration, and/or the duration T all ′ is a periodic duration.
  • the type of the at least one frame is a frame type designated to indicate a link enabled or active state.
  • the at least one frame includes at least one of:
  • the data frame corresponding to the flow identifier TID of the j-th link, the energy-saving polling PS-Poll frame, and the management frame are mapped.
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through an AP affiliated thereto includes S′ third indication fields, and the S′ third indication fields are respectively used to indicate maximum idle time information during link enabling periods corresponding to the S′ links;
  • the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for establishing multiple links, and S′ is a positive integer.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and a first existence field, and the first existence field is used to indicate whether the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element when the value of the first existence field is used to indicate that the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field, the site information field in the per-site configuration sub-element includes the third indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the third indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the first existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the third indication field includes a first subfield and a second subfield, wherein the first subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period of the corresponding link, and the second subfield includes a first field and a second field, the first field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the second field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when communication between the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the corresponding enabled link and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA is unreachable.
  • the first subfield is a maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the second subfield is an idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the first field is a protected maintain enablement required field
  • the second field is an expected behavior field exceeding maximum space time.
  • the association response frame sent by the AP MLD through one of its affiliated APs includes a fourth indication field, and the fourth indication field is used to indicate the maximum idle time information during the link enabling period corresponding to all established links.
  • the association response frame is an association response frame corresponding to the association request frame for multi-link establishment.
  • the association response frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the existence bitmap subfield in the multilink control field of the basic multilink element includes a second existence field, and the second existence field is used to indicate whether the general information field in the multilink control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the general information field in the multi-link control field when the value of the second existence field is used to indicate that the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field, the general information field in the multi-link control field includes the fourth indication field.
  • the fourth indication field is a maximum idle time information field during link enablement
  • the second existence field is a maximum idle time information existence field during link enablement
  • the fourth indication field includes a third subfield and a fourth subfield, wherein the third subfield is used to indicate the maximum idle time during the link enablement period corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element, and the fourth subfield includes a third field and a fourth field, the third field is used to indicate the type information of the frame in the enabled or active state, and the fourth field is used to indicate the behavior of the AP MLD when the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to all links indicated by the basic multi-link element and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA cannot communicate.
  • the third subfield is the maximum idle time subfield during link enablement
  • the fourth subfield is the idle option subfield during link enablement
  • the third field is the protected maintenance enablement required field
  • the fourth field is the expected behavior field exceeding the maximum space time.
  • the AP MLD 900 before the AP MLD manages the N links according to communication reachabilities between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to the N links, the AP MLD 900 further includes:
  • the communication unit 920 is configured to receive a first association request frame through an AP to which it is attached;
  • the first association request frame is used to request to establish a link of the corresponding non-AP MLD affiliated non-AP STA among the M links within the reachable communication range of the AP MLD affiliated AP.
  • the AP MLD 900 before the AP MLD manages the N links according to communication reachabilities between the AP MLD-affiliated APs and the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STAs corresponding to the N links, the AP MLD 900 further includes:
  • the communication unit 920 is configured to receive a second association request frame through an AP to which it is attached;
  • the second association request frame is used to request the establishment of M links, and the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are reachable for communication, and/or the second association request frame includes relevant information on whether the M links are enabled.
  • the corresponding link to be established is indicated as communication reachable and/or enabled
  • the corresponding indication of the proposed link is that communication is unreachable and/or disabled.
  • the second association request frame includes M first indication fields, and/or the second association request frame includes a second indication field;
  • the M first indication fields correspond to the M links respectively, and the M first indication fields are respectively used to indicate whether the corresponding links are reachable for communication;
  • the second indication field is used to indicate whether each link in the M links is enabled.
  • the second association request frame includes a basic multilink element
  • the site control field in the per-site configuration sub-element contained in the link information field of the basic multi-link element includes a link identification field and the first indication field corresponding to the link identified by the link identification field.
  • the first indication field is a reachability field
  • the second indication field is a flow identifier to link mapping element
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP are reachable for communication;
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same basic service set BSS as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the ith proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the ith proposed link and the AP MLD-affiliated AP can communicate with each other; and/or,
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link receives a frame sent by another AP in the same multiple basic service set identifier BSSID set as the AP MLD-affiliated AP corresponding to the i-th proposed link within a preset time
  • the non-AP MLD-affiliated non-AP STA corresponding to the i-th proposed link can communicate with the AP MLD-affiliated AP;
  • the i-th link to be built is the i-th link among the M links, i is a positive integer, and 1 ⁇ i ⁇ M.
  • the preset time is configured or indicated by the AP MLD, or the preset time is determined by negotiation between the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD, or the preset time is agreed upon by a protocol.
  • the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input/output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip.
  • the processing unit may be one or more processors.
  • the AP MLD 900 may correspond to the AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and/or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 900 are respectively for realizing the corresponding process of the AP MLD in the method 500 shown in Figure 20, which will not be repeated here for the sake of brevity.
  • Fig. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 provided in an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 shown in Fig. 25 includes a processor 1010, and the processor 1010 can call and run a computer program from a memory to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may further include a memory 1020.
  • the processor 1010 may call and run a computer program from the memory 1020 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1020 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1010 , or may be integrated into the processor 1010 .
  • the communication device 1000 may further include a transceiver 1030 , and the processor 1010 may control the transceiver 1030 to communicate with other devices, specifically, may send information or data to other devices, or receive information or data sent by other devices.
  • the transceiver 1030 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the transceiver 1030 may further include an antenna, and the number of antennas may be one or more.
  • processor 1010 may implement the functionality of a processing unit in a non-AP MLD, or processor 1010 may implement the functionality of a processing unit in an AP MLD, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.
  • transceiver 1030 may implement the functionality of a communication unit in a non-AP MLD, which will not be described herein for brevity.
  • transceiver 1030 may implement the functionality of a communication unit in AP MLD, which will not be described herein for brevity.
  • the communication device 1000 may specifically be the AP MLD of the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described again here for the sake of brevity.
  • the communication device 1000 may specifically be the non-AP MLD of the embodiment of the present application, and the communication device 1000 may implement the corresponding processes implemented by the non-AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiment of the present application, which will not be described herein for the sake of brevity.
  • Fig. 26 is a schematic structural diagram of a device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • the device 1100 shown in Fig. 26 includes a processor 1110, and the processor 1110 can call and run a computer program from a memory to implement the method according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include a memory 1120.
  • the processor 1110 may call and run a computer program from the memory 1120 to implement the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the memory 1120 may be a separate device independent of the processor 1110 , or may be integrated into the processor 1110 .
  • the device 1100 may further include an input interface 1130.
  • the processor 1110 may control the input interface 1130 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may obtain information or data sent by other devices or chips.
  • the processor 1110 may be located inside or outside the chip.
  • processor 1110 may implement the functionality of a processing unit in a non-AP MLD, or processor 1110 may implement the functionality of a processing unit in an AP MLD, which will not be described in detail here for the sake of brevity.
  • input interface 1130 may implement the functionality of a communication unit in a non-AP MLD, or input interface 1130 may implement the functionality of a communication unit in an AP MLD.
  • the apparatus 1100 may further include an output interface 1140.
  • the processor 1110 may control the output interface 1140 to communicate with other devices or chips, and specifically, may output information or data to other devices or chips.
  • the processor 1110 may be located inside or outside the chip.
  • the output interface 1140 may implement the functionality of a communication unit in a non-AP MLD, or the output interface 1140 may implement the functionality of a communication unit in an AP MLD.
  • the device can be applied to the non-AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application, and the device can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the non-AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the device can be applied to the AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application, and the device can implement the corresponding processes implemented by the AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the device mentioned in the embodiments of the present application may also be a chip, for example, a system-on-chip, a system-on-chip, a chip system, or a system-on-chip chip.
  • FIG27 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system 1200 provided in an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG27 , the communication system 1200 includes a non-AP MLD 1210 and an AP MLD 1220.
  • the non-AP MLD 1210 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the non-AP MLD in the above method
  • the AP MLD 1220 can be used to implement the corresponding functions implemented by the AP MLD in the above method.
  • the sake of brevity they will not be repeated here.
  • the processor of the embodiment of the present application may be an integrated circuit chip with signal processing capabilities.
  • each step of the above method embodiment can be completed by the hardware integrated logic circuit in the processor or the instruction in the form of software.
  • the above processor can be a general processor, a digital signal processor (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), an application specific integrated circuit (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, ASIC), a field programmable gate array (Field Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components.
  • DSP Digital Signal Processor
  • ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
  • FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
  • the methods, steps and logic block diagrams disclosed in the embodiments of the present application can be implemented or executed.
  • the general processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can also be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiment of the present application can be directly embodied as a hardware decoding processor to perform, or the hardware and software modules in the decoding processor can be combined to perform.
  • the software module can be located in a mature storage medium in the field such as a random access memory, a flash memory, a read-only memory, a programmable read-only memory or an electrically erasable programmable memory, a register, etc.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory, and the processor reads the information in the memory and completes the steps of the above method in combination with its hardware.
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application can be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or can include both volatile and non-volatile memories.
  • the non-volatile memory can be a read-only memory (ROM), a programmable read-only memory (PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (EPROM), an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (EEPROM), or a flash memory.
  • the volatile memory can be a random access memory (RAM), which is used as an external cache.
  • RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • SRAM Static RAM
  • DRAM Dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
  • DDR SDRAM Double Data Rate SDRAM
  • ESDRAM Enhanced SDRAM
  • SLDRAM Synchlink DRAM
  • DR RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the memory in the embodiment of the present application may also be static random access memory (static RAM, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (dynamic RAM, DRAM), synchronous dynamic random access memory (synchronous DRAM, SDRAM), double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory (double data rate SDRAM, DDR SDRAM), enhanced synchronous dynamic random access memory (enhanced SDRAM, ESDRAM), synchronous link dynamic random access memory (synch link DRAM, SLDRAM) and direct memory bus random access memory (Direct Rambus RAM, DR RAM), etc. That is to say, the memory in the embodiment of the present application is intended to include but not limited to these and any other suitable types of memory.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium for storing a computer program.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the computer-readable storage medium can be applied to the non-AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program enables the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the non-AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program product, including computer program instructions.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions enable the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the computer program product can be applied to the non-AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application, and the computer program instructions enable the computer to execute the corresponding processes implemented by the non-AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer program.
  • the computer program can be applied to the AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the computer program can be applied to the non-AP MLD in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the computer program runs on a computer, the computer executes the corresponding processes implemented by the non-AP MLD in the various methods of the embodiments of the present application. For the sake of brevity, they will not be repeated here.
  • the disclosed systems, devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are only schematic.
  • the division of the units is only a logical function division. There may be other division methods in actual implementation, such as multiple units or components can be combined or integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • Another point is that the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed can be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which can be electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place or distributed on multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present application may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions are implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as independent products, they can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present application can be embodied in the form of a software product in essence or in other words, the part that contributes to the prior art or the part of the technical solution.
  • the computer software product is stored in a storage medium and includes several instructions for a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in each embodiment of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage media include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), disk or optical disk, and other media that can store program codes.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请实施例提供了一种多链路通信的方法及设备，可以确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。具体的，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立；和/或，non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路；和/或，AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路。

Description

多链路通信的方法及设备 技术领域
本申请实施例涉及通信领域，并且更具体地，涉及一种多链路通信的方法及设备。
背景技术
现阶段，一个非接入点多链路设备(non-access point multi-link device，non-AP MLD)与一个接入点多链路设备(access point multi-link device，AP MLD)之间可以建立多条链路，然而，多条链路中各条链路间可能存在通信可达性差异性而导致链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态不符的问题。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供了一种多链路通信的方法及设备，可以确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
第一方面，提供了一种多链路通信的方法，该方法包括：
non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立；其中，M为正整数。
第二方面，提供了一种多链路通信的方法，该方法包括：
AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第一关联请求帧或第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息；
其中，M为正整数。
第三方面，提供了一种多链路通信的方法，该方法包括：
non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
第四方面，提供了一种多链路通信的方法，该方法包括：
AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
第五方面，提供了一种non-AP MLD，用于执行上述第一方面中的方法。
具体地，该non-AP MLD包括用于执行上述第一方面中的方法的功能模块。
第六方面，提供了一种AP MLD，用于执行上述第二方面中的方法。
具体地，该AP MLD包括用于执行上述第二方面中的方法的功能模块。
第七方面，提供了一种non-AP MLD，用于执行上述第三方面中的方法。
具体地，该non-AP MLD包括用于执行上述第三方面中的方法的功能模块。
第八方面，提供了一种AP MLD，用于执行上述第四方面中的方法。
具体地，该AP MLD包括用于执行上述第四方面中的方法的功能模块。
第九方面，提供了一种non-AP MLD，包括处理器和存储器；该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得该non-AP MLD执行上述第一方面中的方法。
第十方面，提供了一种AP MLD，包括处理器和存储器；该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得该AP MLD执行上述第二方面中的方法。
第十一方面，提供了一种non-AP MLD，包括处理器和存储器；该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得该non-AP MLD执行上述第三方面中的方法。
第十二方面，提供了一种AP MLD，包括处理器和存储器；该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该处理器用于调用并运行该存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得该AP MLD执行上述第四方面中的方法。
第十三方面，提供了一种装置，用于实现上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面中的方法。
具体地，该装置包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有该装置的设备执行如上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面中的方法。
第十四方面，提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面中的方法。
第十五方面，提供了一种计算机程序产品，包括计算机程序指令，所述计算机程序指令使得计算 机执行上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面中的方法。
第十六方面，提供了一种计算机程序，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面至第四方面中的任一方面中的方法。
通过上述技术方案，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立；和/或，non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路；和/或，AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。或者，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路，并上报M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，上报M个链路是否使能的相关信息，从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，non-AP MLD将N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，non-AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，AP MLD将N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
附图说明
图1是本申请实施例应用的一种通信系统架构的示意性图。
图2是本申请提供的non-AP MLD获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息的示意性图。
图3是根据本申请实施例提供的一种多链路通信的方法的示意性流程图。
图4是根据本申请实施例提供的一种多链路建立的示意性流程图。
图5是根据本申请实施例提供的一种站点控制域的示意性图。
图6是根据本申请实施例提供的另一种多链路建立的示意性流程图。
图7是根据本申请实施例提供的另一种站点控制域的示意性图。
图8是根据本申请实施例提供的再一种站点控制域的示意性图。
图9是根据本申请实施例提供的一种站点信息域的示意性图。
图10是根据本申请实施例提供的一种链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息域的示意性图。
图11是根据本申请实施例提供的一种链路使能期间的空闲选项子域的示意性图。
图12是根据本申请实施例提供的一种存在位图子域的示意性图。
图13是根据本申请实施例提供的一种通用信息域的示意性图。
图14是根据本申请实施例提供的一种多链路管理的示意性流程图。
图15是根据本申请实施例提供的另一种多链路管理的示意性流程图。
图16是根据本申请实施例提供的另一种多链路通信的方法的示意性流程图。
图17是根据本申请实施例提供的再一种多链路管理的示意性流程图。
图18是根据本申请实施例提供的再一种多链路管理的示意性流程图。
图19是根据本申请实施例提供的再一种多链路通信的方法的示意性流程图。
图20是根据本申请实施例提供的再一种多链路通信的方法的示意性流程图。
图21是根据本申请实施例提供的一种non-AP MLD的示意性框图。
图22是根据本申请实施例提供的一种AP MLD的示意性框图。
图23是根据本申请实施例提供的另一种non-AP MLD的示意性框图。
图24是根据本申请实施例提供的另一种AP MLD的示意性框图。
图25是根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备的示意性框图。
图26是根据本申请实施例提供的一种装置的示意性框图。
图27是根据本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的示意性框图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行描述，显然，所描述的实施例是本申请一部分实施例，而不是全部的实施例。针对本申请中的实施例，本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例，都属于本申请保护的范围。
本申请实施例的技术方案可以应用于各种通信系统，例如：无线局域网(Wireless Local Area Networks，WLAN)、无线保真(Wireless Fidelity，WiFi)或其他通信系统等。
请参考图1，其示出了本申请一个实施例提供的无线通信系统的示意图。如图1所示，该无线通信系统可以包括：接入点(Access Point，AP)和站点(Station，STA)。
在一些场景中，AP可以或称AP STA，即在某种意义上来说，AP也是一种STA。在一些场景中，STA或称非AP STA(non-AP STA)。
在一些实施例中，STA可以包括AP STA和non-AP STA。通信系统中的通信可以是AP与non-AP STA之间通信，也可以是non-AP STA与non-AP STA之间通信，或者STA与peer STA之间通信。其中，peer STA可以指与STA对端通信的设备。例如，peer STA可能为AP，也可能为non-AP STA。
AP相当于一个连接有线网和无线网的桥梁，主要作用是将各个无线网络客户端连接到一起，然后将无线网络接入以太网。AP设备可以是带有无线保真(Wireless-Fidelity，WIFI)芯片的终端设备(如手机)或者网络设备(如路由器)。
应理解，STA在通信系统中的角色不是绝对的，例如，在一些场景中，手机连接路由的时候，手机是non-AP STA，手机作为其他手机的热点的情况下，手机充当了AP的角色。
AP和non-AP STA可以是应用于车联网中的设备，物联网(Internet of Things，IoT)中的物联网节点、传感器等，智慧家居中的智能摄像头，智能遥控器，智能水表电表等，以及智慧城市中的传感器等。
在一些实施例中，non-AP STA可以支持802.11be制式。non-AP STA也可以支持802.11ax、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等多种当前以及未来的802.11家族的无线局域网制式。
在一些实施例中，AP可以为支持802.11be制式的设备。AP也可以为支持802.11ax、802.11ac、802.11n、802.11g、802.11b及802.11a等多种当前以及未来的802.11家族的WLAN制式的设备。
在本申请实施例中，STA可以是支持WLAN/WIFI技术的手机(Mobile Phone)、平板电脑(Pad)、电脑、虚拟现实(Virtual Reality，VR)设备、增强现实(Augmented Reality，AR)设备、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线设备、机顶盒、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线设备、车载通信设备、远程医疗(remote medical)中的无线设备、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线设备、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线设备、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线设备或智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线设备、无线通信芯片、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，专用集成电路)、SOC(System on Chip，系统级芯片)等。
WLAN技术可支持频段可以包括但不限于：低频段(2.4GHz、5GHz、6GHz)、高频段(45GHz、60GHz)。
站点和接入点之间存在一个或多个链路。在一些实施例中，站点和接入点支持多频段通信。例如，同时在2.4GHz，5GHz，6GHz，45GHz以及60GHz频段上进行通信，或者同时在同一频段(或不同频段)的不同信道上通信，提高设备之间的通信吞吐量和/或可靠性。这种设备通常称为多频段设备，或称为多链路设备(Multi-Link Device，MLD)，有时也称为多链路实体或多频段实体。多链路设备可以是接入点设备，也可以是站点设备。如果多链路设备是接入点设备，则多链路设备中包含一个或多个AP；如果多链路设备是站点设备，则多链路设备中包含一个或多个non-AP STA。
包括一个或多个AP的多链路设备可称为AP，包括一个或多个non-AP STA的多链路设备可称为Non-AP。
在本申请实施例中，AP可以包括多个AP，Non-AP包括多个STA，AP中的AP和Non-AP中的STA之间可以形成多条链路，AP中的AP和Non-AP中的对应STA之间可以通过对应的链路进行数据通信。
AP是一种部署在无线局域网中用以为STA提供无线通信功能的设备。站点可以包括：用户设备(User Equipment，UE)、接入终端、用户单元、用户站、移动站、移动台、远方站、远程终端、移动设备、无线通信设备、用户代理或用户装置。可选地，站点还可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、测量启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol，SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop，WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digita1Assistant，PDA)、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
可选地，站点和接入点均支持IEEE 802.11标准。
应理解，本文中术语“系统”和“网络”在本文中常被可互换使用。本文中术语“和/或”，仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。另外，本文中字符“/”，一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
应理解，在本申请的实施例中提到的“指示”可以是直接指示，也可以是间接指示，还可以是表示具有关联关系。举例说明，A指示B，可以表示A直接指示B，例如B可以通过A获取；也可以表示A间接指示B，例如A指示C，B可以通过C获取；还可以表示A和B之间具有关联关系。
本申请的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释，而非旨在限定本申请。本申请的说明书和权利要求书及所述附图中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”和“第四”等是用于区别不同对象，而不是用于描述特定顺序。此外，术语“包括”和“具有”以及它们任何变形，意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。
在本申请实施例的描述中，术语“对应”可表示两者之间具有直接对应或间接对应的关系，也可以表示两者之间具有关联关系，也可以是指示与被指示、配置与被配置等关系。
本申请实施例中，“预定义”或“预配置”可以通过在设备(例如，包括STA和网络设备)中预先保存相应的代码、表格或其他可用于指示相关信息的方式来实现，本申请对于其具体的实现方式不做限定。比如预定义可以是指协议中定义的。
本申请实施例中，所述“协议”可以指通信领域的标准协议，例如可以包括WiFi协议以及应用于未来的WiFi通信系统中的相关协议，本申请对此不做限定。
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案，以下通过具体实施例详述本申请的技术方案。以下相关技术作为可选方案与本申请实施例的技术方案可以进行任意结合，其均属于本申请实施例的保护范围。本申请实施例包括以下内容中的至少部分内容。
无线设备支持多频段通信，例如，同时在2.4GHz，5GHz，6GHz，45GHz以及60GHz频段上进行通信，或者同时在同一频段(或不同频段)的不同信道上通信，提高设备之间的通信吞吐量和/或可靠性。这种设备通常称为多频段设备，或称为多链路设备(Multi-Link Device，MLD)，有时也称为多链路实体或多频段实体。多链路设备可以是接入点设备，也可以是站点设备。如果多链路设备是接入点设备，则多链路设备中包含一个或多个AP；如果多链路设备是站点设备，则多链路设备中包含一个或多个non-AP STA。
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案，以下对本申请相关的多链路发现与多链路建立进行说明。
如图2所示，non-AP MLD在发起与AP MLD进行多链路建立之前，采用以下一种或共用以下几种方式来获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息：
1)通过non-AP MLD的每个附属站点执行非多链路操作相关的被动扫描流程(Passive scanning)或主动扫描(Active scanning)流程；
2)通过non-AP MLD的其中一个附属站点在AP MLD操作的任意一条链路上传输多链路探测请求(Multi-link probe request)来获取AP MLD及其附属AP的完整信息。
non-AP MLD与AP MLD通过在所请求建立链路中的一条链路上交换关联请求/响应(Association Request/Response)帧来进行多链路建立，如图2所示。其中，关联请求/响应帧都携带基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-link element)来用于多链路建立。non-AP MLD在关联请求帧中指示用于请求建立的多条链路以及它们的能力与操作参数；AP MLD在关联响应帧中指示请求建立的多条链路中接受(Accepted)建立的链路与拒绝(Rejected)建立的链路以及请求链路的能力与操作参数。
对于成功建立的多条链路，AP MLD分配给non-AP MLD一个关联标识符(Association Identifier，AID)，non-AP MLD的所有附属STA具有同一个AID(即多链路建立过程中分配给non-AP MLD的AID)。non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间完成多链路建立后，non-AP MLD与AP MLD建立了多条链路用于多链路操作，同时non-AP MLD关联于AP MLD。
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案，以下对本申请相关的流标识到链路映射进行说明。
流标识到链路映射(TID-to-link mapping)机制允许AP MLD与non-AP MLD正在进行多链路建立(multi-link setup)或者已经完成多链路建立后，针对non-AP MLD确定流标识(traffic identifier，TID)值所对应的上行和下行服务质量(Quality of Service，QoS)流(QoS traffic)怎么分配给已建链路(setup links)进行传输。在缺省情况下，所有的流标识(TID)在下行与上行方向上映射到所有已建链路。可通过流标识到链路映协商，一个TID可以映射到已建链路的一个链路子集上。此外，对于一个non-AP MLD来说，如果至少一个TID在上行或下行映射到一个已建链路上，则该已建链路被定义为“使能(enabled)”或“使能(enabled)状态”；如果没有一个TID在上行或下行映射到 一个已建链路上，则该已建链路被定义为“非使能(disabled)”或“非使能(disabled)状态”。因此，在缺省模式下，所有的已建链路都是使能的(enabled)。
对于一个non-AP MLD，如果一个链路为使能的，则：
1)受制于non-AP MLD操作在该链路上的站点的电源状态，该链路可用于单播帧(individually addressed frame)的交换，而且，对应于TID-to-link mapping只有映射到该链路的TID对应的媒介接入控制服务数据单元(medium access control(MAC)service data unit，MSDU)或聚合媒介接入控制服务数据单元(aggregate medium access control(MAC)service data unit，A-MSDU)可在该链路对应的non-AP MLD附属站点与AP MLD附属AP之间进行下行/上行的传输。
2)对应于TID-to-link mapping映射到该链路的TID对应的MSDU或A-MSDU遵循基于混合协调功能(Hybrid Coordination Function，HCF)竞争的信道接入(如增强分布式信道接入(Enhanced Distributed Channel Access，EDCA))在该链路对应的non-AP MLD附属站点与AP MLD附属AP之间进行下行/上行的传输。
3)单播(individually addressed)管理帧和控制帧可在任意使能的链路对应的non-AP MLD附属站点和其关联的AP MLD附属AP之间进行上行或下行传输。
为便于理解本申请实施例的技术方案，以下对本申请所解决的问题进行说明。
现阶段，当一个non-AP MLD发起与一个AP MLD进行多链路建立，只要所请求建立的链路中有一条请求建立的链路对应的一个non-AP MLD附属站点与一个AP MLD附属AP之间能在可达范围内通信，non-AP MLD不但能获取到其他请求建立的链路对应AP MLD附属AP的信息，并且也能通过这条能在可达范围内通信的链路完成包括其他请求建立的链路的多链路建立，即使其他请求建立的链路对应的non-AP MLD附属站点与AP MLD附属AP可能不在通信范围之内。当完成多链路建立后，缺省情况下，所有的流标识(TID)在下行与上行方向上映射到所有已建链路，其中，包括non-AP MLD中可能不在通信范围之内的已建链路，因此，把non-AP MLD中不在通信范围之内的已建链路也设为使能状态，导致这个不在通信范围之内的已建链路的实际通信状态(即不可通信状态)与该链路的流标识到链路映射对应的链路管理状态(即使能状态)不符。
而且，当一个non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间完成多链路建立，或者一个non-AP MLD关联于一个AP MLD，主要是基于多链路设备(multi-link device，MLD)级别的关联，对于多链路操作，当前多链路管理管理机制建立的假设前提条件是，只要一条已建链路对应的一个non-AP MLD附属站点能与一个AP MLD附属AP在可达范围内通信，那么其他已建链路对应的non-AP MLD的其他附属站点与AP MLD的其他附属AP也能在可达范围内通信。
因此，现阶段，在进行多链路建立过程中或完成多链路建立执行多链路操作时，缺少考虑“对于已建链路中，其中一条链路对应的non-AP MLD的一个附属站点能与AP MLD的一个附属AP在可达范围内通信而另外一条或多条链路对应的non-AP MLD附属站点与AP MLD附属AP通信可能不能通信(在他们的可达范围之外)”的情况。特别地，对于未来将WIFI链路的工作频段扩展到毫米波频段的时候，2.4GHz/5GHz工作频段的可达范围与毫米波工作片段的可达范围存在较大的不同。需在多链路建立以及多链路操作过程中，考虑non-AP MLD的不同链路通信可达范围存在差异从而引发的不同链路的通信可达性问题。
基于上述问题(即在多链路建立与多链路管理过程中链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态不符的问题)，本申请提出了一种多链路通信的方案，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立；和/或，non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路；和/或，AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。或者，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路，并上报M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，上报M个链路是否使能的相关信息，从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，non-AP MLD将N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，non-AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路 的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，AP MLD将N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
以下通过具体实施例详述本申请的技术方案。
图3是根据本申请实施例的多链路通信的方法200的示意性流程图，如图3所示，该多链路通信的方法200可以包括如下内容中的至少部分内容：
S210，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立；其中，M为正整数。
在本申请实施例中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立。也即，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
在本申请实施例中，“字段”也可以称之为“域(field)”或“子域(subfield)”。一个字段可以占用一个或多个字节(byte/octet)，或者，一个字段可以占用一个或多个比特(bit)。
本申请实施例主要针对的是AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间的多链路建立和多链路管理，也可扩展到一个non-AP MLD与另一个non-AP MLD之间的多链路建立和多链路管理，也即，将本申请实施例中的AP MLD替换为另一个non-AP MLD。
在一些实施例中，non-AP MLD可以在发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息。也即，non-AP MLD可以在发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD的信息以及M个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP的信息。
在一些实施例中，该M个链路为该non-AP MLD拟建立的部分或全部链路。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧(例如，信标帧或其他帧)的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集(Basic Service Set，BSS)(co-located BSS)的另一个AP发送的帧(例如，信标帧或其他帧)的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识(Basic Service Set Identifier，BSSID)集(Multiple BSSID set)的另一个AP发送的帧(例如，信标帧或其他帧)的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
在一些实施例中，上述S210具体可以包括：
该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第一关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
也即，对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，进行相应的链路建立，即在多链路建立中关联请求帧所携带的请求建立的链路中包含这些已确定通信可达性的链路；对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，不进行相应的链路建立，即在多链路建立中关联请求帧所携带的请求建立的链路中不包含这些已确定通信不可达的链路。
需要说明的是，该non-AP MLD也可以通过其附属的多个non-AP STA发送该第一关联请求帧，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。也即，non-AP MLD请求建立的链路均可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性， 优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体例如，如图4所示，non-AP MLD的STA1通过信标(Beacon)帧和/或多链路探测响应(ML Probe Response)帧获取了AP MLD及其附属AP的信息；并对拟建立的链路(Link1，Link2，及Link3)进行各自链路的可达性确认(可达性确认方式如上所述)，确认Link1与Link2通信可达，但Link3通信不可达；则non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立的关联请求中，只请求建立Link1与Link2，不请求Link3的建立；在non-AP MLD与AP MLD完成关联请求/响应交互后，完成Link1与Link2的建立。
在一些实施例中，上述S210具体可以包括：
该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
也即，针对non-AP MLD中请求建立链路的每个附属站点都进行相应的链路建立，但non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，对于请求建立的链路的可达性和/或是否使能进行指示。
需要说明的是，该non-AP MLD也可以通过其附属的多个non-AP STA发送该第二关联请求帧，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发送第二关联请求帧以请求建立M个链路，并在第二关联请求帧中携带：M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，M个链路是否使能的相关信息。从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达(reachable)和/或使能(enabled)。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达(unreachable)和/或非使能(disabled)。
具体例如，对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属站点，其对应的拟建链路的可达性指示为“可达(reachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“使能(enabled)”；对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属站点，其对应的拟建链路的可达性指示为“不可达(unreachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“非使能(disabled)”。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；其中，该第二指示域用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域(reachability field)，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素(TID-To-Link Mapping element)。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-Link element)；
其中，该基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-Link element)的链路信息域(Link Info field)所包含的每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点控制域(STA Control field)包括链路标识(link ID)域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域(即可达性域)。
在一些实施例中，基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-Link element)的链路信息域(Link Info field)所包含的每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点控制域(STA Control field)可以如图5所示，该站点控制域(STA Control field)可以包括可达性域(reachability field)。此外，该站点控制域还可以包括以下信息域：完整配置域(Complete Profile)，STA媒介接入控制(medium access control，MAC)地址存在(STA MAC Address Present)域，信标间隔存在(Beacon Interval Present)域，时间同步功能(timing synchronization function，TSF)偏差存在(TSF Offset Present)域，传递流量指示消息(Delivery Traffic Indication Message，DTIM)信息存在(DTIM Info Present)域，非同时发送和接收(Non Simultaneous Transmit and Receive，NSTR)链路对存在(NSTR Link Pair Present)域，BSS参数改变计数存在(BSS Parameters Change Count Present)域。
具体的，如图5所示，可达性域占用1比特。例如，当可达性域取0时表示对应的链路通信可达，即被报告站点在对端站点(peer sta)的可达通信范围内；当可达性域取1时表示对应的链路通信不可达，即被报告站点在对端站点(peer sta)的可达通信范围之外。又例如，例如，当可达性域取1时表示对应的链路通信可达，即被报告站点在对端站点(peer sta)的可达通信范围内；当可达性域取0时表示对应的链路通信不可达，即被报告站点在对端站点(peer sta)的可达通信范围之外。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建链路(设其链路Link-i)，当确定其对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STA i)在该链路所对应的AP MLD附属AP(设为AP i)的可达通信范围内，则在流标识到链路 映射元素中指示至少一个TID在上行或下行映射到该条链路上，即该链路为“使能(enabled)”。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建链路(设其链路Link-j)，当确定其对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STA j)不在该链路所对应的AP MLD附属AP(设为AP j)的可达通信范围内，则在流标识到链路映射元素中指示“没有一个TID在上行或下行映射到该条链路上”，即该链路为“非使能(disabled)”。
具体例如，如图6所示，non-AP MLD的STA1通过信标(Beacon)帧和/或多链路探测响应(ML Probe Response)帧获取了AP MLD及其附属AP的信息；并对拟建立的链路(Link1，Link2，及Link3)进行各自链路的可达性确认(可达性确认方式如上所述)，确认Link1与Link2通信可达，但Link3通信不可达。则non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立的关联请求中，针对请求建立链路的每个附属站点都进行相应的链路(Link1,Link2,Link3)建立，但non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求中，对于Link1和Link2，它们的可达性指示为“可达(reachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“使能(enabled)”，而对于Link3，可达性指示为“不可达(unreachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“非使能(disabled)”。在non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间完成关联请求/响应交互后，完成Link1、Link2以及Link3的建立。
需要说明的是，图6中示例性的示出了关联请求和关联响应中仅指示了是否使能，也可以指示是否可达，或同时指示是否使能和是否可达，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数，且N≤M。
在本申请实施例中，non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路。也即，non-AP MLD可以根据已建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路管理流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
在一些实施例中，该N个链路为该non-AP MLD已建立的部分或全部链路。
在一些实施例中，该N个链路可以包括除上述第一关联请求帧和第二关联请求帧之外的其他关联请求帧请求建立的链路，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，包括：
该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，该non-AP MLD删除该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，在完成多链路建立后，对于已建链路(设为Link-i)，当Link-i对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)与Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)之间的通信不可达的情况下，non-AP MLD可采用以下行为之一：
1)non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射(TID-To-Link Mapping)请求，与AP MLD协商将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态；或者，non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射通知，将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态。
2)non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起链路重配置请求(Link Reconfiguration Request)，与AP MLD协商将Link-i删除；或者，non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起链路重配置通知，将Link-i删除。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识(TID)映射的链路。
具体例如，如果至少一个TID在上行或下行映射到一个已建链路上，则该已建链路被定义为“使能(enabled)”或“使能(enabled)状态”；如果没有一个TID在上行或下行映射到一个已建链路上，则该已建链路被定义为“非使能(disabled)”或“非使能(disabled)状态”。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，对于该N个链路中因对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达的情况下，该non-AP MLD将该链路置为使能状态。
例如，在完成多链路建立后，对于已建链路(设为Link-i)，当Link-i对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)与Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)之间的通信不可达的情况下，non-AP MLD将使能的Link-i置为非使能状态；一段时间之后，由于STAi移动或链路质量好转，STAi与APi之间可能变为通信可达，在STAi与APi之间通信可达之后，non-AP MLD将Link-i置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T j内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T all内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
也即，时长T j可以为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的空闲超时时间限制(idle timeout limit)，时长T all为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的空闲超时时间限制(idle timeout limit)。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j为周期性的时长。也即，时长T j可以为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j为该non-AP MLD确定或指示的。
在一些实施例中，该时长T all为周期性的时长。也即，时长T all可以为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期。
在一些实施例中，该时长T all为该non-AP MLD确定或指示的。
具体例如，在完成多链路建立后，non-AP MLD针对已建链路(设为Link-i)，当Link-i对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(由non-AP MLD发送)”未收到Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)发送的任何帧(在无帧类型要求情形下)或未收到APi发送的指定类型的帧(在有帧类型要求情形下)，Link-i对应的STAi与APi之间的通信不可达。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
具体例如，指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型可以是受保护帧(protected frame)，也即，只有受保护帧(protected frame)指示使能或活跃状况。
具体又例如，指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型可以是受保护帧和非受保护帧，也即，受保护帧和非受保护帧都可指示使能或活跃状况。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括但不限于以下至少之一：映射到该第j个链路的TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询(Power Saving Poll，PS-Poll)帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括S个第三指示域，该S个第三指示域分别用于指示S个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，S为正整数。
也即，该关联请求帧包括的第三指示域可以用于向AP MLD指示时长T j。
可选地，该关联请求帧可以是上述第一关联请求帧，也可以是上述第二关联请求帧。
需要说明的是，该关联请求帧中所包含的第三指示域的数量可以与该关联请求帧所请求建立的链路数量不同，也即，该non-AP MLD可以通过该关联请求帧指示所请求建立的部分或部分链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T j为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息域或链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域或者链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在子域。
在一些实施例中，基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-Link element)的链路信息域(Link Info field)所 包含的每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点控制域(STA Control field)可以如图7所示，该站点控制域(STA Control field)包括链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在(max idle period Info for link enabled Present)域。可选地，在图7的基础上，该站点控制域(STA Control field)还可以如包括上述可达性域(reachability field)，如图8所示。此外，如图7和图8所示，该站点控制域还可以包括以下信息域：完整配置域(Complete Profile)，STA媒介接入控制(medium access control，MAC)地址存在(STA MAC Address Present)域，信标间隔存在(Beacon Interval Present)域，时间同步功能(timing synchronization function，TSF)偏差存在(TSF Offset Present)域，传递流量指示消息(Delivery Traffic Indication Message，DTIM)信息存在(DTIM Info Present)域，非同时发送和接收(Non Simultaneous Transmit and Receive，NSTR)链路对存在(NSTR Link Pair Present)域，BSS参数改变计数存在(BSS Parameters Change Count Present)域。
具体的，如图7和图8所示，链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域占用1比特。例如，当链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域取0时表示每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点信息域(STA Info field)包括链路标识域(Link ID field)所标识的链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域，当链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域取1时表示每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点信息域(STA Info field)不包括链路标识域(Link ID field)所标识的链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域。又例如，当链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域取1时表示每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点信息域(STA Info field)包括链路标识域(Link ID field)所标识的链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域，当链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域取0时表示每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点信息域(STA Info field)不包括链路标识域(Link ID field)所标识的链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域。
在一些实施例中，基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-Link element)的链路信息域(Link Info field)所包含的每站点配置子元素(Per-STA Profile subelement)中的站点信息域(STA Info field)可以如图9所示，该站点信息域(STA Info field)包括链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域。此外，如图9所示，该站点信息域(STA Info field)还可以包括以下至少之一：站点信息长度(STA Info Length)域，STA MAC地址(STA MAC Address)域，信标间隔(Beacon Interval)域，TSF偏差(TSF Offset)域，DTIM信息(DTIM Info)域，NSTR指示位图(NSTR Indication Bitmap)域，BSS参数改变计数(BSS Parameters Change Count)域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T j为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(max idle period for link enabled)子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域，此种情况下，该链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域可以如图10所示，其可以包括链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(max idle period for link enabled)子域和链路使能期间的空闲选项子域。可选地，链路使能期间的空闲选项子域可以如图11所示，其可以包括受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段和超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
具体的，如图10所示，链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(max idle period for link enabled)子域用于指示链路使能期间的空闲超时时间限制(idle timeout limit)，采用1000TUs为单位；其值“0”保留。对于non-AP STA，即链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域是由non-AP STA所附属的non-AP MLD发送：non-AP STA在链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期子域所指示的链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，应接收到其所关联的AP MLD对应附属AP发送至少一个帧(比如映射到该链路的 TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧，同时，符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。对于AP，即链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域是由AP所附属的AP MLD发送：AP在链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期子域所指示的链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，应接收到其所关联的non-AP MLD对应附属non-AP STA发送至少一个帧(比如映射到该链路的TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧，同时，符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。
具体的，如图11所示，受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段占用1比特。例如，受保护维持使能需要字段取1表示只有受保护帧(protected frame)指示使能或活跃状况，受保护维持使能需要字段取0表示受保护帧和非受保护帧都可指示使能或活跃状况。又例如，受保护维持使能需要字段取0表示只有受保护帧(protected frame)指示使能或活跃状况，受保护维持使能需要字段取1表示受保护帧和非受保护帧都可指示使能或活跃状况。
具体例如，对于non-AP STA，即链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息域是由non-AP STA所附属的non-AP MLD发送，受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段用于指示其关联的AP发给该non-AP STA的帧需求。对于AP，即链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息域是由AP所附属的AP MLD发送，受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段用于指示其关联的non-AP STA发给该AP的帧需求。
具体的，如图11所示，超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段占用1比特。例如，超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段取0表示当在对应链路上未收到对等站点发送的任意帧(符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)的持续时间等于或超过“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”子域所指示的时间，则将预期该链路设置为“非使能(Disabled)”；超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段取1表示当在对应链路上未收到对等站点发送的任意帧(符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)的持续时间等于或超过“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”子域所指示的时间，则将预期删除该链路。又例如，超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段取1表示当在对应链路上未收到对等站点发送的任意帧(符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)的持续时间等于或超过“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”子域所指示的时间，则将预期该链路设置为“非使能(Disabled)”；超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段取0表示当在对应链路上未收到对等站点发送的任意帧(符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)的持续时间等于或超过“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”子域所指示的时间，则将预期删除该链路。
具体例如，对于non-AP STA，超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段指示non-AP MLD在链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域所应用的对应链路上未收到该链路的对等站点(即相应AP)发送的任意帧(符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)的持续时间等于或超过“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”子域所指示的时间，则将预期执行的行为。对于AP，超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段指示AP MLD在链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域所应用的对应链路上未收到该链路的对等站点(即相应non-AP STA)发送的任意帧(符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)的持续时间等于或超过“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”子域所指示的时间，则将预期执行的行为。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息。
也即，该关联请求帧包括的第四指示域可以用于向AP MLD指示时长T all。
可选地，该关联请求帧可以是上述第一关联请求帧，也可以是上述第二关联请求帧。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T all可以为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息域或链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时 间周期信息存在域或者链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在子域。
在一些实施例中，基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-Link element)的多链路控制域(Multi-Link Control field)的存在位图子域(Presence Bitmap subfield)可以如图12所示，该存在位图子域(Presence Bitmap subfield)包括链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在(max idle period Info for link enabled Present)域。此外，如图12所示，该存在位图子域还可以包括以下信息域：链路标识信息存在(Link ID Info Present)域，BSS参数改变计数存在(BSS Parameters Change Count Present)域，媒介同步延迟信息存在(Medium Synchronization Delay Information Present)域，增强多链路(Enhanced Multi-Link，EML)能力存在(EML Capabilities Present)域，MLD能力和操作存在(MLD Capabilities and Operations Present)域，AP MLD标识存在域。
在一些实施例中，基本多链路元素(Basic Multi-Link element)的多链路控制域(Multi-Link Control field)中的通用信息(Common Info)域可以如图13所示，该通用信息(Common Info)域包括链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息(max idle period Info for link enabled)域。如图13所示，该通用信息(Common Info)域还可以包括以下至少之一：通用信息长度(Common Info Length)域，MLD MAC地址(MLD MAC Address)域，链路标识信息(Link ID Info)域，BSS参数改变计数(BSS Parameters Change Count)域，媒介同步延迟信息(Medium Synchronization Delay Information)域，EML能力(EML Capabilities)域，MLD能力和操作(MLD Capabilities and Operations)域，AP MLD标识域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T all可以为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(max idle period for link enabled)子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
需要说明的是，该第三子域的格式可以与上述第一子域的格式相同，该第四子域的格式可以与上述第二子域的格式相同，该第三字段的格式可以与上述第一字段的格式相同，该第四字段的格式可以与上述第二字段的格式相同，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，在多链路建立期间，如果non-AP MLD的一个附属non-AP STA在关联请求帧携带的多链路元素的每站点配置子元素中包含链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，则链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域中各子域的值应用于每站点配置子元素对应的链路(即通过携带的Link ID标识)；如果non-AP MLD的一个附属non-AP STA在关联请求帧携带的多链路元素的通用信息域中包含链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，则链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域中各子域的值应用于多链路元素所指示的所有链路或发送多链路元素所在的链路。其中，对于non-AP MLD发送的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域所应用的链路，该链路对应的non-AP STA在该子域所指示的链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，应接收到它所关联的AP MLD对应附属AP(即该链路对应的AP)发送至少一个帧(比如映射到该链路的TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧，同时，符合该子域所指示的受保护维持使能需要子域(如有)所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。
在一些实施例中，non-AP MLD在发起与AP MLD进行多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息。non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求帧中的基本多链路元素携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，用于指示对于相应链路，其链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，其对应的non-AP STA应接收到它所关联的AP MLD对应附属AP发送至少一个帧(比如映射到该链路的TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧，同时，符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。可选地，AP MLD在关联响应帧中的基本多链路元素也携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，用于指示Non-AP站点应该在该子域所指示的链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，给它所关联的AP发送至少一个维持该链路使能状态的帧(比如映射到该链路的TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧， 同时，符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。
可选地，在完成多链路建立后，对于non-AP MLD，针对其中的使能链路(即Enabled Link，设为Link-i)，当Link-i对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(由non-AP MLD发送)”未收到Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)发送的任何帧(在无帧类型要求情形下)或未收到APi发送的指定类型的帧(在有帧类型要求情形下)，则non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射(TID-To-Link Mapping)请求，与AP MLD协商将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态；或者，non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射通知，将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态。具体例如，如图14所示，non-AP MLD在发起与AP MLD进行多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息。non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求帧中的基本多链路元素携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，即图14中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T1；同时，AP MLD在关联响应帧中的基本多链路元素也携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”(可选)，即图14中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T2。完成多链路建立后，对于使能链路Link3，当其开始使能状态后，如果STA3在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”(即图14中的T1)未收到AP3发送的任何帧(无帧类型要求)或在T1时段未收到AP3发送的指定类型的帧(有帧类型要求)，则non-AP MLD通过Link1发起流标识到链路映射(TID-To-Link Mapping)请求，与non-AP MLD协商将Link3设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态。
可选地，在完成多链路建立后，对于non-AP MLD，针对其中的使能链路(即Enabled Link，设为Link-i)，当Link-i对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(由non-AP MLD发送)”未收到Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)发送的任何帧(在无帧类型要求情形下)或未收到APi发送的指定类型的帧(在有帧类型要求情形下),则non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起链路重配置请求(Link Reconfiguration Request)，与AP MLD协商将Link-i删除；或者，non-AP MLD向AP MLD发起链路重配置通知，将Link-i删除。其中，如果non-AP MLD还有其他的使能链路，则保持non-AP MLD关联于AP MLD的状态。具体例如，如图15所示，non-AP MLD在发起与AP MLD进行多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息。non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求帧中的基本多链路元素携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，即图15中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T1；同时，AP MLD在关联响应帧中的基本多链路元素也携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”(可选)，即图15中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T2。完成多链路建立后，对于使能链路Link3,当它开始使能状态后，如果STA3在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”(图15中的T1)未收到AP3发送的任何帧(无帧类型要求)或在T1时段未收到AP3发送的指定类型的帧(有帧类型要求)，则non-AP MLD通过Link1发起链路重配置请求(Link Reconfiguration Request)，与AP MLD协商将Link3删除，因还有使能链路Link1和Link2，则保持non-AP MLD关联于AP MLD的状态。
可选地，链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T2大于链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T1。
因此，在本申请实施例中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立；和/或，non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。或者，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路，并上报M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，上报M个链路是否使能的相关信息，从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，non-AP MLD将N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路置为非使能状态，或者，non-AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
上文结合图3至图15，详细描述了本申请的non-AP MLD侧实施例，下文结合图16至图18，详 细描述本申请的AP MLD侧实施例，应理解，AP MLD侧实施例与non-AP MLD侧实施例相互对应，类似的描述可以参照non-AP MLD侧实施例。
图16是根据本申请实施例的多链路通信的方法300的示意性流程图，如图16所示，该多链路通信的方法300可以包括如下内容中的至少部分内容：
S310，AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第一关联请求帧或第二关联请求帧；其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路；其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息；其中，M为正整数。
在本申请实施例中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立。具体的，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发送该第一关联请求帧或该第二关联请求帧。也即，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
在本申请实施例中，“字段”也可以称之为“域(field)”或“子域(subfield)”。一个字段可以占用一个或多个字节(byte/octet)，或者，一个字段可以占用一个或多个比特(bit)。
本申请实施例主要针对的是AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间的多链路建立和多链路管理，也可扩展到一个non-AP MLD与另一个non-AP MLD之间的多链路建立和多链路管理，也即，将本申请实施例中的AP MLD替换为另一个non-AP MLD。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧(例如，信标帧或其他帧)的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集(Basic Service Set，BSS)(co-located BSS)的另一个AP发送的帧(例如，信标帧或其他帧)的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识(Basic Service Set Identifier，BSSID)集(Multiple BSSID set)的另一个AP发送的帧(例如，信标帧或其他帧)的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
在一些实施例中，在AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第一关联请求帧的情况下，该第一关联请求帧基于拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性确定。
也即，对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，进行相应的链路建立，即在多链路建立中关联请求帧所携带的请求建立的链路中包含这些已确定通信可达性的链路；对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，不进行相应的链路建立，即在多链路建立中关联请求帧所携带的请求建立的链路中不包含这些已确定通信不可达的链路。
需要说明的是，该non-AP MLD也可以通过其附属的多个non-AP STA发送该第一关联请求帧，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。也即，non-AP MLD请求建立的链路均可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体例如，如图4所示，non-AP MLD的STA1通过信标(Beacon)帧和/或多链路探测响应(ML Probe Response)帧获取了AP MLD及其附属AP的信息；并对拟建立的链路(Link1，Link2，及Link3)进行各自链路的可达性确认(可达性确认方式如上所述)，确认Link1与Link2通信可达，但Link3通信不可达；则non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立的关联请求中，只请求建立Link1与Link2，不请求 Link3的建立；在non-AP MLD与AP MLD完成关联请求/响应交互后，完成Link1与Link2的建立。
在一些实施例中，在AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第二关联请求帧的情况下，该第二关联请求帧基于拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性确定。
也即，针对non-AP MLD中请求建立链路的每个附属站点都进行相应的链路建立，但non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，对于请求建立的链路的可达性和/或是否使能进行指示。
需要说明的是，该non-AP MLD也可以通过其附属的多个non-AP STA发送该第二关联请求帧，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发送第二关联请求帧以请求建立M个链路，并在第二关联请求帧中携带：M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，M个链路是否使能的相关信息。从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达(reachable)和/或使能(enabled)。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达(unreachable)和/或非使能(disabled)。
具体例如，对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属站点，其对应的拟建链路的可达性指示为“可达(reachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“使能(enabled)”；对于拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属站点，其对应的拟建链路的可达性指示为“不可达(unreachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“非使能(disabled)”。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；其中，该第二指示域用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域(reachability field)，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素(TID-To-Link Mapping element)。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域。
需要说明的是，该第二关联请求帧的格式可以参考上述多链路通信的方法200中图5的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
具体例如，如图6所示，non-AP MLD的STA1通过信标(Beacon)帧和/或多链路探测响应(ML Probe Response)帧获取了AP MLD及其附属AP的信息；并对拟建立的链路(Link1，Link2，及Link3)进行各自链路的可达性确认(可达性确认方式如上所述)，确认Link1与Link2通信可达，但Link3通信不可达。则non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立的关联请求中，针对请求建立链路的每个附属站点都进行相应的链路(Link1,Link2,Link3)建立，但non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求中，对于Link1和Link2，它们的可达性指示为“可达(reachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“使能(enabled)”，而对于Link3，可达性指示为“不可达(unreachable)”和/或链路相应指示为“非使能(disabled)”。在non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间完成关联请求/响应交互后，完成Link1、Link2以及Link3的建立。
需要说明的是，图6中示例性的示出了关联请求和关联响应中仅指示了是否使能，也可以指示是否可达，或同时指示是否使能和是否可达，本申请实施例对此并不限定。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数，且N≤M。
在本申请实施例中，AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路。也即，AP MLD可以根据已建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路管理流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
在一些实施例中，该N个链路为该AP MLD已建立的部分或全部链路。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，包括：
该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，该AP MLD删除该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP 与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，在完成多链路建立后，对于已建链路(设为Link-i)，当Link-i对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)与Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)之间的通信不可达的情况下，AP MLD可采用以下行为之一：
1)AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射(TID-To-Link Mapping)请求，与non-AP MLD协商将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态；或者，AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射通知，将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态。
2)AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起链路重配置请求(Link Reconfiguration Request)，与non-AP MLD协商将Link-i删除；或者，AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起链路重配置通知，将Link-i删除。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识(TID)映射的链路。
具体例如，如果至少一个TID在上行或下行映射到一个已建链路上，则该已建链路被定义为“使能(enabled)”或“使能(enabled)状态”；如果没有一个TID在上行或下行映射到一个已建链路上，则该已建链路被定义为“非使能(disabled)”或“非使能(disabled)状态”。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，对于该N个链路中因对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达的情况下，该AP MLD将该链路置为使能状态。
例如，在完成多链路建立后，对于已建链路(设为Link-i)，当Link-i对应的non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)与Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)之间的通信不可达的情况下，AP MLD将使能的Link-i置为非使能状态；一段时间之后，由于STAi移动或链路质量好转，STAi与APi之间可能变为通信可达，在STAi与APi之间通信可达之后，AP MLD将Link-i置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T j′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T all′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j′为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all′为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
也即，时长T j′可以为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的空闲超时时间限制(idle timeout limit)，时长T all′为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的空闲超时时间限制(idle timeout limit)。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j′为周期性的时长。也即，时长T j′可以为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j′为该AP MLD确定或指示的。
在一些实施例中，该时长T all′为周期性的时长。也即，时长T all′可以为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期。
在一些实施例中，该时长T all′为该AP MLD确定或指示的。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
具体例如，指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型可以是受保护帧(protected frame)，也即，只有受保护帧(protected frame)指示使能或活跃状况。
具体又例如，指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型可以是受保护帧和非受保护帧，也即，受保护帧和非受保护帧都可指示使能或活跃状况。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括但不限于以下至少之一：映射到该第j个链路的TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询(Power Saving Poll，PS-Poll)帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包 括S′个第三指示域，该S′个第三指示域分别用于指示S′个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息；其中，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧，S′为正整数。
也即，该关联响应帧包括的第三指示域可以用于向non-AP MLD指示时长T j′。
可选地，该关联响应帧可以是针对上述第一关联请求帧的关联响应帧，也可以是针对上述第二关联请求帧的关联响应帧。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j′为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T j′为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息域或链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域或者链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在子域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j′为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T j′为第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(max idle period for link enabled)子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
需要说明的是，该第一存在域和该第三指示域的具体格式可以参考上述多链路通信的方法200中图7至图11的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧。
也即，该关联响应帧包括的第四指示域可以用于向AP MLD指示时长T all′。
可选地，该关联响应帧可以是上述第一关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧，也可以是上述第二关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j′为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T all′可以为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息域或链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在域或者链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息存在子域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该AP MLD在该基 本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在时长T j′为周期性的时长的情况下，也即，时长T all′可以为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期的情况下，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(max idle period for link enabled)子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要(Protected Keep-enabled Required)字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
需要说明的是，该第二存在域和该第四指示域的具体格式可以参考上述多链路通信的方法200中图12至图13的相关描述，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，在多链路建立期间，如果AP MLD的一个附属AP在关联响应帧携带的多链路元素的每站点配置子元素中包含链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，则链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域中各子域的值应用于每站点配置子元素对应的链路(即通过携带的Link ID标识)；如果AP MLD的一个附属AP在关联响应帧携带的多链路元素的通用信息域中包含链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域，则链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域中各子域的值应用于多链路元素所指示的所有链路或发送多链路元素所在的链路。其中，对于AP MLD发送的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息子域所应用的链路，该链路所对应的Non-AP站点应该在该子域所指示的链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，给它所关联的AP(即该链路对应的AP)发送至少一个维持该链路使能状态的帧(比如映射到该链路的TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧，同时，符合该子域所指示的受保护维持使能需要子域(如有)所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。
在一些实施例中，AP MLD在关联响应帧中的基本多链路元素也携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，用于指示Non-AP站点应该在该子域所指示的链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，给它所关联的AP发送至少一个维持该链路使能状态的帧(比如映射到该链路的TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧，同时，符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。可选地，non-AP MLD在发起与AP MLD进行多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息。non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求帧中的基本多链路元素携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，用于指示对于相应链路，其链路使能期间的最大空闲周期内，其对应的non-AP STA应接收到它所关联的AP MLD对应附属AP发送至少一个帧(比如映射到该链路的TID所对应的数据帧、PS-Poll帧、或管理帧，同时，符合受保护维持使能需要子域所指示的帧要求)，才能认为该链路维持在使能状态的。
可选地，对于AP MLD，针对其与non-AP MLD建立的使能链路(即Enabled Link,设为Link-i),当Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(由AP MLD发送)”未收到Link-i对应的Non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)发送的任何帧(在无帧类型要求情形下)或未收到STAi发送的指定类型的帧(在有帧类型要求情形下),则AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射(TID-To-Link Mapping)请求，与non-AP MLD协商将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态；或者，AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起流标识到链路映射通知，将Link-i设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态。具体例如，如图17所示，non-AP MLD在发起与AP MLD进行多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息。non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求帧中的基本多链路元素携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”(可选)，即图17中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T1；同时，AP MLD在关联响应帧中的基本多链路元素也携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，即图17中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T2。在完成多链路建立后，对于AP MLD，当使能链路Link3开始使能状态后，如果AP3在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”(图中的T2)未收到STA3发送的任何帧(无帧类型要求)或在T2时段未收到STA3发送的指定类型的帧(有帧类型要求)，则AP MLD通过Link1发起流标识到链路映射(TID-To-Link Mapping)请求，与non-AP MLD协商将Link3设置为“非使能(Disabled)”状态。
可选地，对于AP MLD，针对其与non-AP MLD建立的使能链路(即Enabled Link,设为Link-i),当Link-i对应的AP MLD附属站点(设为APi)在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期(由AP MLD发送)”未收到Link-i对应的Non-AP MLD附属站点(设为STAi)发送的任何帧(在无帧 类型要求情形下)或未收到STAi发送的指定类型的帧(在有帧类型要求情形下),则AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起链路重配置请求(Link Reconfiguration Request)，与non-AP MLD协商将Link-i删除；或者，AP MLD向non-AP MLD发起链路重配置通知，将Link-i删除。其中，如果non-AP MLD还有其他的使能链路，则保持non-AP MLD关联于AP MLD的状态。具体例如，如图18所示，non-AP MLD在发起与AP MLD进行多链路建立之前，获取AP MLD及其感兴趣的每个附属AP的信息。non-AP MLD在发起多链路建立时，在关联请求帧中的基本多链路元素携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”(可选)，即图18中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T1；同时，AP MLD在关联响应帧中的基本多链路元素也携带请求建立链路的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期信息”，即图18中链路3对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期T2。在完成多链路建立后，对于使能链路Link3，当它开始使能状态后，如果AP3在相应的“链路使能期间的最大空闲时间周期”(图18中的T2)未收到STA3发送的任何帧(无帧类型要求)或在T2时段未收到STA3发送的指定类型的帧(有帧类型要求)，则AP MLD通过Link1发起链路重配置请求(Link Reconfiguration Request)，与non-AP MLD协商将Link3删除，因还有使能链路Link1和Link2，则保持non-AP MLD关联于AP MLD的状态。
因此，在本申请实施例中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立；和/或，AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。或者，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路，并上报M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，上报M个链路是否使能的相关信息，从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，AP MLD将N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路置为非使能状态，或者，AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
上文结合图3至图15，详细描述了本申请的non-AP MLD侧的一个实施例，下文结合图19，详细描述本申请的non-AP MLD侧的另一个实施例，应理解，non-AP MLD侧实施例相互对应，类似的描述可以参照上述图3至图15所示的实施例。
图19是根据本申请实施例的多链路通信的方法400的示意性流程图，如图19所示，该多链路通信的方法400可以包括如下内容中的至少部分内容：
S410，non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，包括：
该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，该non-AP MLD删除该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该方法还包括：
对于该N个链路中因对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达的情况下，该non-AP MLD将该链路置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T j内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T all内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j为周期性的时长，和/或，该时长T all为周期性的时长。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
映射到该第j个链路的TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括S个第三指示域，该S个第三指示域分别用于指示S个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，S为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD根据该N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性管理该N个链路之前，该non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立，其中，M为正整数，M≥N。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立，包括：
该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第一关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立，包括：
该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD的附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；其中，该第二指示域分别用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
因此，在本申请实施例中，non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路；和/或，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。或者，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路，并上报M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，上报M个链路是否使能的相关信息，从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，non-AP MLD将N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路置为非使能状态，或者，non-AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
上文结合图16至图18，详细描述了本申请的AP MLD侧的一个实施例，下文结合图20，详细描述本申请的AP MLD侧的另一个实施例，应理解，AP MLD侧实施例相互对应，类似的描述可以参照上述图16至图18所示的实施例。
图20是根据本申请实施例的多链路通信的方法500的示意性流程图，如图20所示，该多链路通信的方法500可以包括如下内容中的至少部分内容：
S510，AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，包括：
该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，该AP MLD删除该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该方法还包括：
对于该N个链路中因对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达的情况下，该AP MLD将该链路置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T j′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T all′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j′为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all′为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j′为周期性的时长，和/或，该时长T all′为周期性的时长。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
映射到该第j个链路的流标识TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括S′个第三指示域，该S′个第三指示域分别用于指示S′个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息；其中，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧，S′为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该AP MLD在该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD根据该N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性管理该N个链路之前，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第一关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD根据该N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性管理该N个链路之前，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
对于拟建立的链路关联的AP MLD的附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
其中，该第二指示域分别用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链 路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD的附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
因此，在本申请实施例中，AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理N个链路；和/或，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与AP MLD之间的多链路建立。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立过程中，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。或者，non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，请求建立M个链路，并上报M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，上报M个链路是否使能的相关信息，从而可以反映链路的实际通信状态。换句话说，non-AP MLD可以根据拟建立的链路的通信可达性，优化多链路建立流程，从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
具体的，在多链路建立完成后，AP MLD将N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路置为非使能状态，或者，AP MLD删除N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。从而确保链路的实际通信状态与链路使能状态相符。
上文结合图3至图20，详细描述了本申请的方法实施例，下文结合图21至图27，详细描述本申请的装置实施例，应理解，装置实施例与方法实施例相互对应，类似的描述可以参照方法实施例。
图21示出了根据本申请实施例的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD 600的示意性框图。如图21所示，该non-AP MLD 600包括：
通信单元610，用于根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA与接入点多链路设备AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立；其中，M为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该通信单元610具体用于：
通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第一关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
在一些实施例中，该通信单元610具体用于：
通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
其中，该第二指示域用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链 路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD 600还包括：
处理单元620，用于根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数，且N≤M。
在一些实施例中，该处理单元620具体用于：
将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，删除该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，对于该N个链路中因对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达的情况下，该处理单元620还用于将该链路置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T j内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T all内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j为周期性的时长，和/或，该时长T all为周期性的时长。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
映射到该第j个链路的TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括S个第三指示域，该S个第三指示域分别用于指示S个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，S为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路 的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，上述通信单元可以是通信接口或收发器，或者是通信芯片或者片上系统的输入输出接口。上述处理单元可以是一个或多个处理器。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的non-AP MLD 600可对应于本申请方法实施例中的non-AP MLD，并且non-AP MLD 600中的各个单元的上述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图3所示方法200中non-AP MLD的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图22示出了根据本申请实施例的接入点多链路设备AP MLD 700的示意性框图。如图22所示，该AP MLD 700包括：
通信单元710，用于通过其附属的一个接入点AP接收第一关联请求帧或第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息；
其中，M为正整数。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
其中，该第二指示域用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到 该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD 700还包括：
处理单元720，用于根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数，且N≤M。
在一些实施例中，该处理单元720具体用于：
将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，删除该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该方法还包括：
对于该N个链路中因对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达的情况下，该AP MLD将该链路置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T j′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T all′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j′为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all′为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j′为周期性的时长，和/或，该时长T all′为周期性的时长。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
映射到该第j个链路的流标识TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括S′个第三指示域，该S′个第三指示域分别用于指示S′个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息；
其中，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧，S′为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链 路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该AP MLD在该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，上述通信单元可以是通信接口或收发器，或者是通信芯片或者片上系统的输入输出接口。上述处理单元可以是一个或多个处理器。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的AP MLD 700可对应于本申请方法实施例中的AP MLD，并且AP MLD 700中的各个单元的上述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图16所示方法300中AP MLD的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图23示出了根据本申请实施例的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD 800的示意性框图。如图23所示，该non-AP MLD 800包括：
处理单元810，用于根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的非接入点站点non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与接入点多链路设备AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该处理单元810具体用于：
将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，删除该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，该non-AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，对于该N个链路中因对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达的情况下，该处理单元810 还用于将该链路置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T j内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T all内接收到该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j为周期性的时长，和/或，该时长T all为周期性的时长。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
映射到该第j个链路的TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括S个第三指示域，该S个第三指示域分别用于指示S个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，S为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all确定该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，该non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息。
在一些实施例中，该用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该non-AP MLD在该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行 为字段。
在一些实施例中，在该non-AP MLD根据该N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性管理该N个链路之前，该non-AP MLD 800还包括：
通信单元810，用于根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与该AP MLD之间的多链路建立，其中，M为正整数，M≥N。
在一些实施例中，该通信单元810具体用于：
通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第一关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
在一些实施例中，该通信单元810具体用于：
通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立该M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD的附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
其中，该第二指示域分别用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
在一些实施例中，上述通信单元可以是通信接口或收发器，或者是通信芯片或者片上系统的输入输出接口。上述处理单元可以是一个或多个处理器。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的non-AP MLD 800可对应于本申请方法实施例中的non-AP MLD，并且non-AP MLD 800中的各个单元的上述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图19所示方法400中non-AP MLD的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图24示出了根据本申请实施例的接入点多链路设备AP MLD 900的示意性框图。如图24所示，该AP MLD 900包括：
处理单元910，用于根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属接入点AP与非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理该N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该处理单元910具体用于：
将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，删除该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。
在一些实施例中，该AP MLD对该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，该N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD将该N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，对于该N个链路中因对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在该链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达的情况下，该处理单元910还用于将该链路置为使能状态。
在一些实施例中，在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T j′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；或者，
在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T all′内接收到该第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；
其中，该第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，该时长T j′为该第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该时长T all′为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该时长T j′为周期性的时长，和/或，该时长T all′为周期性的时长。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
在一些实施例中，该至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
映射到该第j个链路的流标识TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T j′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括S′个第三指示域，该S′个第三指示域分别用于指示S′个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息；
其中，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧，S′为正整数。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，该第一存在域用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第一存在域的取值用于指示该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域的情况下，该每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第三指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，该第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，该第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第二字段用于指示该AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在基于该时长T all′确定该第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，该AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括第四指示域，该第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，该关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧。
在一些实施例中，该关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，该第二存在域用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，在该第二存在域的取值用于指示该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四 指示域的情况下，该多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括该第四指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，该第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
在一些实施例中，该第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，该第三子域用于指示该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，该第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，该第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，该第四字段用于指示该AP MLD在该基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA通信不可达时的行为。
在一些实施例中，该第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，该第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，该第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，该第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD根据该N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性管理该N个链路之前，该AP MLD 900还包括：
通信单元920，用于通过其附属的一个AP接收第一关联请求帧；
其中，该第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
在一些实施例中，在该AP MLD根据该N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性管理该N个链路之前，该AP MLD 900还包括：
通信单元920，用于通过其附属的一个AP接收第二关联请求帧；
其中，该第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括该M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
在一些实施例中，对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
对于拟建立的链路关联的AP MLD的附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，该第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
其中，该M个第一指示域分别对应该M个链路，该M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
其中，该第二指示域分别用于指示该M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
在一些实施例中，该第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
其中，该基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和该链路标识域所标识的链路对应的该第一指示域。
在一些实施例中，该第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，该第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
在一些实施例中，在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与该第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，该第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD的附属AP之间通信可达；
其中，该第i个拟建链路为该M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
在一些实施例中，该预设时间由该AP MLD配置或指示，或者，该预设时间由该non-AP MLD与该AP MLD协商确定，或者，该预设时间由协议约定。
在一些实施例中，上述通信单元可以是通信接口或收发器，或者是通信芯片或者片上系统的输入输出接口。上述处理单元可以是一个或多个处理器。
应理解，根据本申请实施例的AP MLD 900可对应于本申请方法实施例中的AP MLD，并且AP MLD 900中的各个单元的上述和其它操作和/或功能分别为了实现图20所示方法500中AP MLD的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图25是本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备1000示意性结构图。图25所示的通信设备1000包括 处理器1010，处理器1010可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
在一些实施例中，如图25所示，通信设备1000还可以包括存储器1020。其中，处理器1010可以从存储器1020中调用并运行计算机程序，以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
其中，存储器1020可以是独立于处理器1010的一个单独的器件，也可以集成在处理器1010中。
在一些实施例中，如图25所示，通信设备1000还可以包括收发器1030，处理器1010可以控制该收发器1030与其他设备进行通信，具体地，可以向其他设备发送信息或数据，或接收其他设备发送的信息或数据。
其中，收发器1030可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器1030还可以进一步包括天线，天线的数量可以为一个或多个。
在一些实施例中，处理器1010可以实现non-AP MLD中的处理单元的功能，或者，处理器1010可以实现AP MLD中的处理单元的功能，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，收发器1030可以实现non-AP MLD中的通信单元的功能，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，收发器1030可以实现AP MLD中的通信单元的功能，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，该通信设备1000具体可为本申请实施例的AP MLD，并且该通信设备1000可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，该通信设备1000具体可为本申请实施例的non-AP MLD，并且该通信设备1000可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由non-AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
图26是本申请实施例的装置的示意性结构图。图26所示的装置1100包括处理器1110，处理器1110可以从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
在一些实施例中，如图26所示，装置1100还可以包括存储器1120。其中，处理器1110可以从存储器1120中调用并运行计算机程序，以实现本申请实施例中的方法。
其中，存储器1120可以是独立于处理器1110的一个单独的器件，也可以集成在处理器1110中。
在一些实施例中，该装置1100还可以包括输入接口1130。其中，处理器1110可以控制该输入接口1130与其他设备或芯片进行通信，具体地，可以获取其他设备或芯片发送的信息或数据。可选地，处理器1110可以位于芯片内或芯片外。
在一些实施例中，处理器1110可以实现non-AP MLD中的处理单元的功能，或者，处理器1110可以实现AP MLD中的处理单元的功能，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，输入接口1130可以实现non-AP MLD中的通信单元的功能，或者，输入接口1130可以实现AP MLD中的通信单元的功能。
在一些实施例中，该装置1100还可以包括输出接口1140。其中，处理器1110可以控制该输出接口1140与其他设备或芯片进行通信，具体地，可以向其他设备或芯片输出信息或数据。可选地，处理器1110可以位于芯片内或芯片外。
在一些实施例中，输出接口1140可以实现non-AP MLD中的通信单元的功能，或者，输出接口1140可以实现AP MLD中的通信单元的功能。
在一些实施例中，该装置可应用于本申请实施例中的non-AP MLD，并且该装置可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由non-AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，该装置可应用于本申请实施例中的AP MLD，并且该装置可以实现本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，本申请实施例提到的装置也可以是芯片。例如可以是系统级芯片，系统芯片，芯片系统或片上系统芯片等。
图27是本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统1200的示意性框图。如图27所示，该通信系统1200包括non-AP MLD 1210和AP MLD 1220。
其中，该non-AP MLD 1210可以用于实现上述方法中由non-AP MLD实现的相应的功能，以及该AP MLD 1220可以用于实现上述方法中由AP MLD实现的相应的功能，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
应理解，本申请实施例的处理器可能是一种集成电路芯片，具有信号的处理能力。在实现过程中，上述方法实施例的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。上述的处理器可以是通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit，ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field Programmable Gate Array，FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件。可以实现或者执行本申请实施例中的公开的各方法、步骤及逻辑框图。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规 的处理器等。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件译码处理器执行完成，或者用译码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。软件模块可以位于随机存储器，闪存、只读存储器，可编程只读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。该存储介质位于存储器，处理器读取存储器中的信息，结合其硬件完成上述方法的步骤。
可以理解，本申请实施例中的存储器可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
应理解，上述存储器为示例性但不是限制性说明，例如，本申请实施例中的存储器还可以是静态随机存取存储器(static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(double data rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(synch link DRAM，SLDRAM)以及直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM，DR RAM)等等。也就是说，本申请实施例中的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，用于存储计算机程序。
在一些实施例中，该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的AP MLD，并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，该计算机可读存储介质可应用于本申请实施例中的non-AP MLD，并且该计算机程序使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由non-AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品，包括计算机程序指令。
在一些实施例中，该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的AP MLD，并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，该计算机程序产品可应用于本申请实施例中的non-AP MLD，并且该计算机程序指令使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由non-AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序。
在一些实施例中，该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的AP MLD，当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
在一些实施例中，该计算机程序可应用于本申请实施例中的non-AP MLD，当该计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行本申请实施例的各个方法中由non-AP MLD实现的相应流程，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个 系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。针对这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本申请的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (129)

  1. 一种多链路通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA与接入点多链路设备AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，发起与所述AP MLD之间的多链路建立；其中，M为正整数。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与所述AP MLD之间的多链路建立，包括：
    所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第一关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第一关联请求帧用于请求建立所述M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
  3. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与所述AP MLD之间的多链路建立，包括：
    所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第二关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第二关联请求帧用于请求建立所述M个链路，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
  4. 如权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，
    对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
    对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
  5. 如权利要求3或4所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
    其中，所述M个第一指示域分别对应所述M个链路，所述M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
    其中，所述第二指示域用于指示所述M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第一指示域。
  7. 如权利要求5或6所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，所述第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
  8. 如权利要求1至7中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第i个拟建链路为所述M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述预设时间由所述AP MLD配置或指示，或者，所述预设时间由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定，或者，所述预设时间由协议约定。
  10. 如权利要求1至9中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，其中，N为正整数，且N≤M。
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD 附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，包括：
    所述non-AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，所述non-AP MLD删除所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。
  12. 如权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD对所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定。
  13. 如权利要求11或12所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述non-AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
  14. 如权利要求11至13中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述non-AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    对于所述N个链路中因对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在所述链路对应non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达的情况下，所述non-AP MLD将所述链路置为使能状态。
  15. 如权利要求10至14中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T j内接收到所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；或者，
    在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T all内接收到所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，所述时长T j为所述第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述时长T all为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述时长T j为周期性的时长，和/或，所述时长T all为周期性的时长。
  17. 如权利要求15或16所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
  18. 如权利要求15至17中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
    映射到所述第j个链路的TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
  19. 如权利要求15至18中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T j确定所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括S个第三指示域，所述S个第三指示域分别用于指示S个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，S为正整数。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，所述第一存在域用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第一存在域的取值用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域的情况下，所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  22. 如权利要求20或21所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  23. 如权利要求19至22中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，所述第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期 间的最大空闲时间，所述第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，所述第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第二字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
  24. 如权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  25. 如权利要求15至18中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T all确定所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括第四指示域，所述第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息。
  26. 如权利要求25所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，所述第二存在域用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括所述第四指示域。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第二存在域的取值用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域的情况下，所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域。
  28. 如权利要求26或27所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  29. 如权利要求26至28中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，所述第三子域用于指示所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，所述第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第四字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD在所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
  30. 如权利要求29所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  31. 一种多链路通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接入点多链路设备AP MLD通过其附属的一个接入点AP接收第一关联请求帧或第二关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路；
    其中，所述第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否使能的相关信息；
    其中，M为正整数。
  32. 如权利要求31所述的方法，其特征在于，
    对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
    对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
  33. 如权利要求31或32所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
    其中，所述M个第一指示域分别对应所述M个链路，所述M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
    其中，所述第二指示域用于指示所述M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
  34. 如权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第一指示域。
  35. 如权利要求33或34所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，所述第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
  36. 如权利要求31至35中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第i个拟建链路为所述M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
  37. 如权利要求36所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述预设时间由所述AP MLD配置或指示，或者，所述预设时间由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定，或者，所述预设时间由协议约定。
  38. 如权利要求31至37中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    所述AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，其中，N为正整数，且N≤M。
  39. 如权利要求38所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，包括：
    所述AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，所述AP MLD删除所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。
  40. 如权利要求39所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述AP MLD对所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定。
  41. 如权利要求39或40所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
  42. 如权利要求39至41中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    对于所述N个链路中因对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在所述链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达的情况下，所述AP MLD将所述链路置为使能状态。
  43. 如权利要求38至42中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T j′内接收到所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；或者，
    在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T all′内接收到所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，所述时长T j′为所述第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述时长T all′为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
  44. 如权利要求43所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述时长T j′为周期性的时长，和/或，所述时长T all′为周期性的时长。
  45. 如权利要求43或44所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
  46. 如权利要求43至45中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
    映射到所述第j个链路的流标识TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
  47. 如权利要求43至46中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T j′确定所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括S′个第三指示域，所述S′个第三指示域分别用于指示S′个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息；
    其中，所述关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧，S′为正整数。
  48. 如权利要求47所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，所述第一存在域用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  49. 如权利要求48所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第一存在域的取值用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域的情况下，所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  50. 如权利要求48或49所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  51. 如权利要求47至50中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，所述第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，所述第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第二字段用于指示所述AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达时的行为。
  52. 如权利要求51所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  53. 如权利要求43至46中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T all′确定所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括第四指示域，所述第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，所述关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧。
  54. 如权利要求53所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，所述第二存在域用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括所述第四指示域。
  55. 如权利要求54所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第二存在域的取值用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域的情况下，所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域。
  56. 如权利要求54或55所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  57. 如权利要求54至56中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，所述第三子域用于指示所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，所述第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第四字段用于指示所述AP MLD在所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA通信不可达时的行为。
  58. 如权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  59. 一种多链路通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的非接入点站点non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与接入点多链路设备AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
  60. 如权利要求59所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，包括：
    所述non-AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，所述non-AP MLD删除所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路。
  61. 如权利要求60所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD对所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定。
  62. 如权利要求60或61所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述non-AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
  63. 如权利要求60至62中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述non-AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    对于所述N个链路中因对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在所述链路对应non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达的情况下，所述non-AP MLD将所述链路置为使能状态。
  64. 如权利要求59至63中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T j内接收到所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；或者，
    在第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在时长T all内接收到所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，所述时长T j为所述第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述时长T all为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
  65. 如权利要求64所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述时长T j为周期性的时长，和/或，所述时长T all为周期性的时长。
  66. 如权利要求64或65所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
  67. 如权利要求64至66中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
    映射到所述第j个链路的TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
  68. 如权利要求64至67中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T j确定所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括S个第三指示域，所述S个第三指示域分别用于指示S个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，S为正整数。
  69. 如权利要求68所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，所述第一存在域用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  70. 如权利要求69所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第一存在域的取值用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域 所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域的情况下，所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  71. 如权利要求69或70所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  72. 如权利要求68至71中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，所述第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，所述第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第二字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
  73. 如权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  74. 如权利要求64至67中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T all确定所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送的用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括第四指示域，所述第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息。
  75. 如权利要求74所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述用于多链路建立的关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，所述第二存在域用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括所述第四指示域。
  76. 如权利要求75所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第二存在域的取值用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域的情况下，所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域。
  77. 如权利要求75或76所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  78. 如权利要求75至77中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，所述第三子域用于指示所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，所述第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第四字段用于指示所述non-AP MLD在所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信不可达时的行为。
  79. 如权利要求78所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  80. 如权利要求59至79中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述non-AP MLD根据所述N个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性管理所述N个链路之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与所述AP MLD之间的多链路建立，其中，M为正整数，M≥N。
  81. 如权利要求80所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与所述AP MLD之间的多链路建立，包括：
    所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第一关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第一关联请求帧用于请求建立所述M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
  82. 如权利要求80所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述non-AP MLD根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间的通信可达性，发起与所述AP MLD之间的多链路建立，包括：
    所述non-AP MLD通过其附属的一个non-AP STA发送第二关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第二关联请求帧用于请求建立所述M个链路，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
  83. 如权利要求82所述的方法，其特征在于，
    对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
    对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD的附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
  84. 如权利要求82或83所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
    其中，所述M个第一指示域分别对应所述M个链路，所述M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
    其中，所述第二指示域分别用于指示所述M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
  85. 如权利要求84所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第一指示域。
  86. 如权利要求84或85所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，所述第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
  87. 如权利要求80至86中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第i个拟建链路为所述M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
  88. 如权利要求87所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述预设时间由所述AP MLD配置或指示，或者，所述预设时间由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定，或者，所述预设时间由协议约定。
  89. 一种多链路通信的方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接入点多链路设备AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属接入点AP与非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
  90. 如权利要求89所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述AP MLD根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，包括：
    所述AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态，或者，所述AP MLD删除所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路。
  91. 如权利要求90所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述AP MLD对所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的链路的处理方式由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定。
  92. 如权利要求90或91所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述N个链路中置为非使能状态的链路是指无流标识TID映射的链路。
  93. 如权利要求90至92中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述AP MLD将所述N个链路中对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达的使能链路置为非使能状态的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    对于所述N个链路中因对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达而置为非使能状态的链路，在所述链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达的情况下，所述AP MLD将所述链路置为使能状态。
  94. 如权利要求89至93中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T j′内接收到所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；或者，
    在第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在时长T all′内接收到所述第j个链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA发送的至少一个帧的情况下，所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第j个链路为已建立的所有链路中的第j个链路，所述时长T j′为所述第j个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述时长T all′为已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，j为正整数。
  95. 如权利要求94所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述时长T j′为周期性的时长，和/或，所述时长T all′为周期性的时长。
  96. 如权利要求94或95所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧的类型为指定的用于指示链路使能或活跃状态的帧类型。
  97. 如权利要求94至96中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述至少一个帧包括以下至少之一：
    映射到所述第j个链路的流标识TID所对应的数据帧，节能轮询PS-Poll帧，管理帧。
  98. 如权利要求94至97中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T j′确定所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括S′个第三指示域，所述S′个第三指示域分别用于指示S′个链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息；
    其中，所述关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧，S′为正整数。
  99. 如权利要求98所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和第一存在域，所述第一存在域用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域是否包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  100. 如权利要求99所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述第一存在域的取值用于指示所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域的情况下，所述每站点配置子元素中的站点信息域包括所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第三指示域。
  101. 如权利要求99或100所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第一存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  102. 如权利要求98至101中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三指示域包括第一子域和第二子域，其中，所述第一子域用于指示对应链路的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述第二子域包括第一字段和第二字段，所述第一字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第二字段用于指示所述AP MLD在对应使能链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间通信不可达时的行为。
  103. 如权利要求102所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第二子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第一字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第二字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  104. 如权利要求94至97中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在基于所述时长T all′确定所述第j个链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性的情况下，所述AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP发送的关联响应帧包括第四指示域，所述第四指示域用于指示已建立的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息，所述关联响应帧为用于多链路建立的关联请求帧对应的关联响应帧。
  105. 如权利要求104所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述关联响应帧包括基本多链路元素；
    其中，所述基本多链路元素的多链路控制域中的存在位图子域包括第二存在域，所述第二存在域 用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中是否包括所述第四指示域。
  106. 如权利要求105所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第二存在域的取值用于指示所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域的情况下，所述多链路控制域中的通用信息域中包括所述第四指示域。
  107. 如权利要求105或106所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四指示域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息域，所述第二存在域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间信息存在域。
  108. 如权利要求105至107中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第四指示域包括第三子域和第四子域，其中，所述第三子域用于指示所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的链路使能期间的最大空闲时间，所述第四子域包括第三字段和第四字段，所述第三字段用于指示使能或活跃状态的帧的类型信息，所述第四字段用于指示所述AP MLD在所述基本多链路元素所指示的所有链路对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA通信不可达时的行为。
  109. 如权利要求108所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第三子域为链路使能期间的最大空闲时间子域，所述第四子域为链路使能期间的空闲选项子域，所述第三字段为受保护维持使能需要字段，所述第四字段为超过最大空间时间的预期行为字段。
  110. 如权利要求89至109中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述AP MLD根据所述N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性管理所述N个链路之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第一关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路。
  111. 如权利要求89至109中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在所述AP MLD根据所述N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属AP与non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA之间的通信可达性管理所述N个链路之前，所述方法还包括：
    所述AP MLD通过其附属的一个AP接收第二关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否使能的相关信息。
  112. 如权利要求111所述的方法，其特征在于，
    对于拟建立的链路对应的AP MLD附属AP在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信可达和/或使能；
    对于拟建立的链路关联的AP MLD的附属AP不在可达通信范围内的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA，其对应的拟建立链路指示为通信不可达和/或非使能。
  113. 如权利要求111或112所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括M个第一指示域，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括第二指示域；
    其中，所述M个第一指示域分别对应所述M个链路，所述M个第一指示域分别用于指示对应的链路是否通信可达；
    其中，所述第二指示域分别用于指示所述M个链路中的各个链路是否使能。
  114. 如权利要求113所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第二关联请求帧包括基本多链路元素；其中，所述基本多链路元素的链路信息域所包含的每站点配置子元素中的站点控制域包括链路标识域和所述链路标识域所标识的链路对应的所述第一指示域。
  115. 如权利要求113或114所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述第一指示域为可达性域，和/或，所述第二指示域为流标识到链路映射元素。
  116. 如权利要求110至115中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一位置基本服务集BSS的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下，所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD附属AP之间通信可达；和/或，
    在第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA在预设时间内接收到与所述第i个拟建链路对应的AP MLD附属AP处于同一个多基本服务集标识BSSID集的另一个AP发送的帧的情况下， 所述第i个拟建链路对应的non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与AP MLD的附属AP之间通信可达；
    其中，所述第i个拟建链路为所述M个链路中的第i个链路，i为正整数，且1≤i≤M。
  117. 如权利要求116所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述预设时间由所述AP MLD配置或指示，或者，所述预设时间由所述non-AP MLD与所述AP MLD协商确定，或者，所述预设时间由协议约定。
  118. 一种非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：
    通信单元，用于根据拟建立的M个链路各自对应的non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA与接入点多链路设备AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，发起与所述AP MLD之间的多链路建立；其中，M为正整数。
  119. 一种接入点多链路设备AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：
    通信单元，用于通过其附属的一个接入点AP接收第一关联请求帧或第二关联请求帧；
    其中，所述第一关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路中对应的非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA在AP MLD附属AP的可达通信范围内的链路；
    其中，所述第二关联请求帧用于请求建立M个链路，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否通信可达的相关信息，和/或，所述第二关联请求帧包括所述M个链路是否使能的相关信息；
    其中，M为正整数。
  120. 一种非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的非接入点站点non-AP MLD附属non-AP STA与接入点多链路设备AP MLD附属接入点AP之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
  121. 一种接入点多链路设备AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于根据已建立的N个链路各自对应的AP MLD附属接入点AP与非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD附属非接入点站点non-AP STA之间的通信可达性，管理所述N个链路，其中，N为正整数。
  122. 一种非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：处理器和存储器，所述存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得所述non-AP MLD执行如权利要求1至30中任一项所述的方法。
  123. 一种接入点多链路设备AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：处理器和存储器，所述存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得所述AP MLD执行如权利要求31至58中任一项所述的方法。
  124. 一种非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：处理器和存储器，所述存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得所述non-AP MLD执行如权利要求59至88中任一项所述的方法。
  125. 一种接入点多链路设备AP MLD，其特征在于，包括：处理器和存储器，所述存储器用于存储计算机程序，所述处理器用于调用并运行所述存储器中存储的计算机程序，使得所述AP MLD执行如权利要求89至117中任一项所述的方法。
  126. 一种芯片，其特征在于，包括：处理器，用于从存储器中调用并运行计算机程序，使得安装有所述芯片的设备执行如权利要求1至30中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求31至58中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求59至88中任一项所述的方法，或者，执行如权利要求89至117中任一项所述的方法。
  127. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，用于存储计算机程序，当所述计算机程序被执行时，如权利要求1至30中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求31至58中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求59至88中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求89至117中任一项所述的方法被实现。
  128. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，包括计算机程序指令，当所述计算机程序指令被执行时，如权利要求1至30中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求31至58中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求59至88中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求89至117中任一项所述的方法被实现。
  129. 一种计算机程序，其特征在于，当所述计算机程序被执行时，如权利要求1至30中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求31至58中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求59至88中任一项所述的方法被实现，或者，如权利要求89至117中任一项所述的方法被实现。
PCT/CN2022/122814 2022-09-29 2022-09-29 多链路通信的方法及设备 WO2024065461A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/122814 WO2024065461A1 (zh) 2022-09-29 2022-09-29 多链路通信的方法及设备

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2022/122814 WO2024065461A1 (zh) 2022-09-29 2022-09-29 多链路通信的方法及设备

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024065461A1 true WO2024065461A1 (zh) 2024-04-04

Family

ID=90475409

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/122814 WO2024065461A1 (zh) 2022-09-29 2022-09-29 多链路通信的方法及设备

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2024065461A1 (zh)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113747502A (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-03 华为技术有限公司 多链路试关联方法及相关装置
CN113766613A (zh) * 2020-06-02 2021-12-07 苹果公司 用于wlan的多链路休眠模式
CN113825167A (zh) * 2020-06-18 2021-12-21 华为技术有限公司 链路可达性的确定方法及装置
WO2021261822A1 (ko) * 2020-06-22 2021-12-30 현대자동차주식회사 다중 링크를 지원하는 통신 시스템에서 프레임의 송수신을 위한 방법 및 장치
US20220124855A1 (en) * 2020-10-15 2022-04-21 Facebook Technologies, Llc Methods and systems for multi-link operations

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113747502A (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-03 华为技术有限公司 多链路试关联方法及相关装置
CN113766613A (zh) * 2020-06-02 2021-12-07 苹果公司 用于wlan的多链路休眠模式
CN113825167A (zh) * 2020-06-18 2021-12-21 华为技术有限公司 链路可达性的确定方法及装置
WO2021261822A1 (ko) * 2020-06-22 2021-12-30 현대자동차주식회사 다중 링크를 지원하는 통신 시스템에서 프레임의 송수신을 위한 방법 및 장치
US20220124855A1 (en) * 2020-10-15 2022-04-21 Facebook Technologies, Llc Methods and systems for multi-link operations

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
SRINIVAS KANDALA (SAMSUNG): "BSS Max Idle Period Negotiation Enhancements for non-S1G PHYs", IEEE 802.11-20/1313R9, 17 September 2020 (2020-09-17), pages 1 - 9, XP068173378 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2021238823A1 (zh) 多链路试关联方法及相关装置
EP4156556A1 (en) Target object sensing method and apparatus
US9060359B2 (en) Method and apparatus for transceiving data in a wireless LAN system
TWI433582B (zh) 與多帶行動站相關聯用以選擇多帶存取點的方法及裝置
US20210212150A1 (en) Method and apparatus for multi-link operations
US11924823B2 (en) Multi-link device association and reassociation
US20150341966A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting frame in wireless local area network (wlan) system
WO2022033592A1 (zh) 适用于多链路的关键bss参数管理方法及相关装置
CN106028322B (zh) 无线通信的设备、系统和方法
JP2023178343A (ja) マルチリンク通信方法および関連装置
WO2021190605A1 (zh) 无线局域网中应用于多链路设备的通信方法及装置
US11882514B2 (en) Communications method and communications apparatus
WO2021197174A1 (zh) 接入点ap多链路设备发现方法及相关装置
TWI805263B (zh) 直連鏈路定址方法及裝置
WO2013185581A1 (zh) 初始入网连接建立通信装置和方法
EP3780792B1 (en) Signal transmission method, central access point (ap) and radio remote unit (rru)
WO2020078248A1 (zh) 无线通信方法及设备
US20240155717A1 (en) Buffer report sending and receiving method, and apparatus
WO2022022380A1 (zh) 无线局域网中的通信方法、装置及系统
WO2021135413A1 (zh) 一种节能控制方法及相关设备
WO2023036081A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及通信装置
WO2024065461A1 (zh) 多链路通信的方法及设备
WO2023138497A1 (zh) 通信方法、接入点多链路设备和非接入点多链路设备
WO2023035845A1 (zh) 一种应用于通道直接链路建立的传输方法及装置
WO2023159404A1 (zh) 通信方法和多链路设备

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22960098

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1